Yamaha RX-530 Handleiding

Categorie
AV-ontvangers
Type
Handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
Printed in Malaysia
V874610
RX-V530RDS
GB
OWNER’S MANUAL
MODE D’EMPLOI
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
BRUKSANVISNING
MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING
RX-V530RDS
AV Receiver
Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo
0100V530(GB)-cv1/4 1/18/02, 8:44 PM1
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this
manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future
reference.
2 Install this unit in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place with at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the
left and right, and 10 cm at the back of this unit
— away from direct sunlight, heat sources,
vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical
appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid
humming sounds. To prevent fire or electrical
shock, do not place this unit where it may get
exposed to rain, water, and/or any type of liquid.
4
Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature
changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this
unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room
with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside
this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 On the top of this unit, do not place:
Other components, as they may cause damage
and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit.
Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause
fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
Containers with liquid in them, as they may
cause electrical shock to the user and/or
damage to this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper,
tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct
heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit
rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or
personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all
connections are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may
overheat, possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall
outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this
might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used.
Using this unit with a higher voltage than
specified is dangerous and may cause fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any
damage resulting from use of this unit with a
voltage other than specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the
power cord from the wall outlet during an
electrical storm.
14 Take care of this unit so that no foreign objects
and/or liquid drops inside this unit.
15 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact
qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any
service is needed. The cabinet should never be
opened for any reasons.
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
16 When not planning to use this unit for long
periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC
power plug from the wall outlet.
17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section
on common operating errors before concluding
that this unit is faulty.
18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set
this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the
AC power plug from the wall outlet.
19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and General models
only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this
unit must be set for your local main voltage
BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply.
Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.
This unit is not disconnected from the AC power
source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet,
even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called
the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to
consume a very small quantity of power.
For U.K. customers
If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the
plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and
an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the
instructions described below.
Note
The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a
plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live
socket outlet.
Special Instructions for U.K.
Model
IMPORTANT
THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED
IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING
CODE:
Blue: NEUTRAL
Brown: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this
apparatus may not correspond with the coloured
markings identifying the terminals in your plug,
proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected
to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or
coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured
BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is
marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth
terminal of the three pin plug.
CAUTION
0101V530_Cau_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:39 PM2
1
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS ............................................................ 1
FEATURES ............................................................. 2
GETTING STARTED ............................................ 3
Checking the package contents ................................. 3
Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4
Front panel ................................................................ 4
Remote control .......................................................... 6
Using the remote control ........................................... 7
Front panel display .................................................... 8
PREPARATION
SPEAKER SETUP ................................................. 9
Speakers .................................................................... 9
Speaker placement .................................................... 9
Connecting the speakers .......................................... 10
CONNECTIONS .................................................. 13
Before connecting components ............................... 13
Connecting video components ................................ 14
Connecting audio components ................................ 16
Connecting the antennas ......................................... 17
Connecting an external decoder .............................. 18
Connecting the power supply cords ........................ 18
Turning on the power .............................................. 19
SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS .......................... 20
ADJUSTING SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS .. 21
Using the test tone ................................................... 21
BASIC OPERATION
BASIC PLAYBACK ............................................ 23
Input modes and indications .................................... 25
Selecting a sound field program .............................. 26
DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING
(DSP) ................................................................. 29
Understanding sound fields ..................................... 29
Hi-Fi DSP programs ................................................ 29
CINEMA-DSP ...................................................... 30
Sound design of CINEMA-DSP ............................. 30
CINEMA-DSP programs ........................................ 32
TUNING ................................................................ 34
Automatic and manual tuning ................................. 34
Presetting stations .................................................... 35
Tuning in to a preset station .................................... 37
Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 37
RECEIVING RDS STATIONS ........................... 38
Description of RDS data ......................................... 38
Changing the RDS mode ......................................... 38
PTY SEEK function ................................................ 39
EON function .......................................................... 39
SLEEP TIMER ..................................................... 40
Setting the sleep timer ............................................. 40
Canceling the sleep timer ........................................ 40
RECORDING ....................................................... 41
ADVANCED OPERATION
SET MENU ........................................................... 42
Adjusting the items on the SET MENU .................. 42
1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) ............ 43
2 LFE LEVEL ........................................................ 45
3 SP DLY TIME (speaker delay time) ................... 45
4 D. RANGE (dynamic range) ............................... 46
5 L/R BALANCE (balance of the main left and
right speakers) ..................................................... 46
6 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ........ 46
7 I/O ASSIGN (input/output assignment) .............. 46
8 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) .................... 47
9 DISPLAY SET .................................................... 47
10MEM. GUARD (memory guard) ........................ 47
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ................... 48
Control area ............................................................. 48
Setting the manufacturer code ................................. 49
Clearing setup manufacturer codes ......................... 49
Controlling other components ................................. 50
ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT
SPEAKERS ....................................................... 51
ADJUSTING THE DELAY TIME ..................... 52
ADJUSTING THE PARAMETER SETTINGS
FOR PRO LOGIC
MUSIC ......................... 53
Changing parameter settings ................................... 53
PRO LOGIC Music parameter descriptions ....... 53
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................... 54
GLOSSARY .......................................................... 58
SPECIFICATIONS .............................................. 60
0102V530_1-8_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:39 PM1
2
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby, Pro Logic, and the double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories.
DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks of
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
FEATURES
Built-in 5-channel power amplifier
Minimum RMS output power
(0.06% THD, 20 Hz 20 kHz, 8)
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
Main: 75 W + 75 W
Center: 75 W
Rear: 75 W + 75 W
[Other models]
Main: 65 W + 65 W
Center: 65 W
Rear: 65 W + 65 W
Multi-mode digital sound field
processing
Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic decoder
Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital + Matrix 6.1
decoder
DTS/DTS + Matrix 6.1 decoder
CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP
technology and Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital
or DTS
Virtual CINEMA DSP
SILENT CINEMA DSP
Sophisticated AM/FM Tuner
40-Station random access preset tuning
Automatic preset tuning
Preset station shifting capability (Preset
editing)
Other features
96-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
SET MENU for optimizing this unit for your
Audio/Video system
Test tone generator for easier speaker balance
adjustment
6-channel external decoder input
S-video signal input/output capability
Component video input/output capability
Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks
Sleep timer
Remote control with preset manufacturer codes
About this manual
y indicates a tip for your operation.
Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button
names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses in this
manual.
This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part for the reason of the improvement
in operativity ability, and others. In this case, the product has priority.
0102V530_1-8_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:39 PM2
3
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
1
2
3
POWER
SLEEP
CODE SET
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
SELECT
PRESET/CH
TV INPUTTV MUTE
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOLUME
LEVEL
MENU
TEST
STEREO
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
TITLE
MUTE
AMP
POWER POWER
AVTV
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
+
+
+
+
TV CHTV VOL
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
B
Installing batteries in the remote
control
Insert the batteries in the correct direction by aligning the
+ and marks on the batteries with the polarity markings
(+ and ) inside the battery compartment.
1 Press the part and slide off the battery
compartment cover.
2 Insert the four supplied batteries (AAA, R03,
UM-4) according to the polarity markings on
the inside of the battery compartment.
3 Slide the cover back on so that it snaps into
place.
Notes on batteries
Change all of the batteries if you notice a decrease in
the operating range of the remote control, that the
indicator does not flash, or the light becoming dim.
Do not use old batteries together with new ones.
Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline
and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging
carefully as these different types of batteries may have
the same shape and color.
If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them
immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or
letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean
the battery compartment thoroughly before installing
new batteries.
If the remote control is without batteries for more than
2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the
remote control, the contents of the memory may be
cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new
batteries, set up the manufacturer code that may have
been cleared.
AM loop antenna
(Europe, U.K., Australia and
Singapore models)
Indoor FM antenna
(U.S.A., Canada, China,
Korea and General models)
Batteries (4)
(AAA, R03, UM-4)
Remote control
GETTING STARTED
Checking the package contents
Check your package to make sure it contains the following items.
75-ohm/300-ohm antenna
adapter (U.K. model)
A/V cable (U.S.A., Canada
and Australia models)
0102V530_1-8_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:39 PM3
4
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
SILENT
PHONES
STEREO
PROGRAM
PRESET
/
TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
BASS
+ +
TREBLE
INPUT
INPUT M0DE
6CH INPUT
VOLUME
STANDBY
/
ON
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING MODE
START
EON
RDS MODE/FREQ
MODE
PTY SEEK
EFFECT
1234567
90 e
irt8qyuw
START
EON
RDS MODE/FREQ
MODE
PTY SEEK
po sa
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Front panel
1 STANDBY/ON
Turns this unit on, or set it to the standby mode. When
you turn this unit on, you will hear a click and there will
be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce
sound.
Standby mode
In this mode, this unit will consume a small amount of
power in order to receive infrared-signals from the
remote control.
2 Remote control sensor
Receives signals from the remote control.
3 Front panel display
Shows information about the operational status of this
unit.
4 INPUT MODE
Sets the priority for the types of input signals (AUTO,
DTS, ANALOG) to receive when one component is
connected to two or more input jacks. Priority cannot be
set when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source.
5 INPUT l / h
Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch.
6 VOLUME
Controls the output level of all audio channels.
This does not affect the OUT (REC) level.
7 6CH INPUT
Selects the audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT
jacks. This audio takes priority over the source selected
with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons on the
remote control).
(U.K. and Europe model)
0102V530_1-8_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:39 PM4
5
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
8 SILENT (PHONES jack)
Allows you enjoy DSP effect for private listening with
headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals
are output to the speakers.
9 STEREO/EFFECT
Switches between normal stereo and DSP effect
reproduction. When STEREO is selected, 2-channel
signals are directed to the main left and right speakers
without effect sounds and all Dolby Digital and DTS
signals (except the LFE channel) are mixed down to the
main left and right speakers.
0 PROGRAM l / h
Selects the DSP program.
q MEMORY (MANL/AUTO FM)
Stores the current station in the memory.
w TUNING MODE (AUTO/MANL MONO)
Switches the tuning mode between automatic and manual.
e FM/AM
Switches the reception band between FM and AM.
r PRESET/TUNING (EDIT)
Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h
between selecting a preset station number and tuning (the
colon (:) turns on or off).
This button is also used to exchange the assignment of
two preset stations with each other.
t PRESET/TUNING l / h
Selects preset station numbers 1 to 8 when the colon (:)
appears in the front panel display.
Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) does not
appear.
y A/B/C/D/E
Selects preset station groups A to E.
u BASS
Adjusts the low-frequency response for the main left and
right channels.
Turn right to increase or turn left to decrease the low-
frequency response.
i TREBLE
Adjusts the high-frequency response for the main left and
right channels.
Turn right to increase or turn left to decrease the high-
frequency response.
o RDS MODE/FREQ (U.K. and Europe models)
When an RDS station is received, press this button to
change the display mode among the PS mode, PTY mode,
RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS data
service) and/or frequency display mode in turn.
p PTY SEEK MODE (U.K. and Europe models)
Press this button to set the unit in the PTY SEEK mode.
a PTY SEEK START (U.K. and Europe models)
Press this button to begin searching for a station after the
desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK
mode.
s EON (U.K. and Europe models)
Press this button to select the desired program type
(NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) when you want to
tune in to a radio program of that type automatically.
0102V530_1-8_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:39 PM5
6
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
POWER
SLEEP
CODE SET
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
SELECT
PRESET/CH
TV INPUT
TV MUTE
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOLUME
LEVEL
MENU
TEST
STEREO
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
TITLE
MUTE
AMP
POWER POWER
AVTV
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
+
+
+
+
TV CHTV VOL
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
B
8
9
0
y
i
u
t
e
r
w
q
7
6
5
2
1
3
4
Remote control
This section describes the remote control controls and
their functions. Make sure that the AMP mode is selected
before starting operation. See REMOTE CONTROL
FEATURES on pages 48 to 50.
1 Infrared window
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the
component you want to operate.
2 CODE SET
Used when setting up the manufacturer code (see page
49).
3 Input selector buttons
Select the input source and set the remote control to
operate the selected source component.
4 DSP program
Select DSP programs for the AMP position. Press a
button repeatedly to select a DSP program within that
group.
5 LEVEL
Selects the effect speaker channel to be adjusted.
6 Multi control section
Used when changing the setting and to implement the
settings.
7 TEST
Outputs the test tone to adjust the speaker levels.
8 TRANSMIT indicator
Flashes while the remote control is sending signals.
9 STANDBY
Sets this unit in the standby mode.
0 SYSTEM POWER
Turns on the power of this unit.
q SLEEP
Sets the sleep timer.
w 6CH INPUT
Selects the audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT
jacks.
e AMP
Sets the remote control to the AMP mode for controlling
this unit.
r Å/ı
Sets the remote control to operate other components (not
necessarily connected to this unit) without changing this
units input source.
t VOLUME +/
Increases or decreases the volume level.
0102V530_1-8_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:39 PM6
7
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
SILENT
PHONES
STEREO
EFFECT
PROGRAM
PRESET
/
TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
BASS
+ +
TREBLE
INPUT
INPUT M0DE
6CH INPUT
VOLUME
STANDBY
/
ON
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING MODE
30° 30°
Approximately 6 m (20 feet)
y MUTE
Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output
to the previous volume level.
u STEREO/EFFECT
Switches between normal stereo and DSP effect
reproduction. When STEREO is selected, 2-channel
signals are directed to the main left and right speakers
without effect sounds and all Dolby Digital and DTS
signals (except the LFE channel) are mixed down to the
main left and right speakers.
i SET MENU
Selects the SET MENU mode.
Using the remote control
The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on the main unit during operation.
Handling the remote control
Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote
control.
Do not drop the remote control.
Do not leave or store the remote control in the
following types of conditions:
high humidity or temperature such as near a heater,
stove or bath;
dusty places; or
in places subject to extremely low temperatures.
0102V530_1-8_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:39 PM7
8
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
RL
LCR
RC RR
LFE
VIRTUAL
DSP
PCM
MATRIX
SILENT
DIGITAL
EON
PS PTY
PTY HOLD
dB
mS
RT
CT
MUTE
SLEEP
STEREO
TUNED
MEMORY
AUTO
PRO LOGIC
/
VOLUME
DTS
MOVIE
THTR
ENTERTAINMENT
12
DOLBY DIGITAL
PRO
LOGIC
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER CD
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
1234
5789
0
qwert y
6
1 Processor indicators
Lights up when the t, g, VIRTUAL,
PRO LOGIC
/
,
DSP
or MATRIX are activated.
2 Input source indicator
Shows the current input source with a cursor.
3 MUTE indicator
Flashes while the MUTE function is on.
4 VOLUME level indicator
Indicates the volume level.
5 v indicator
Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code
modulation) digital audio signals.
6 SILENT indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected while the
digital sound field processor is on.
7 Headphones indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected.
8 DSP program indicators
The name of the selected DSP program lights up when the
ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER 1, MOVIE
THEATER 2 or V/DTS SURROUND DSP program is
selected.
9 Multi-information display
Shows the current DSP program name and other
information when adjusting or changing settings.
0 RDS indicator (U.K. and Europe models)
The name(s) of the RDS data offered by the currently
received RDS station light(s) up.
EON indicator lights up when an RDS station that offers
the EON data service is being received.
PTY HOLD indicator lights up while searching for
stations in the PTY SEEK mode.
q STEREO indicator
Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an
FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit.
w TUNED indicator
Lights up when this unit is tuned to a station.
e MEMORY indicator
Flashes to show a station can be stored.
r AUTO indicator
Shows that this unit is in the automatic tuning mode.
t SLEEP indicator
Lights up while the sleep timer is on.
y Input channel indicator
Indicates the channel components of input signals being
received.
Front panel display
(U.K. and Europe models)
0102V530_1-8_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:39 PM8
9
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SPEAKER SETUP
Speakers
This unit has been designed to provide the best sound-
field quality with a 5-speaker system, using main left and
right speakers, rear left and right speakers and a center
speaker. If you use different brands of speakers (with
different tonal qualities) in your system, the tone of a
moving human voice and other types of sound may not
shift smoothly. We recommend that you use speakers
from the same manufacturer or speakers with the same
tonal quality.
The main speakers are used for the main source sound
plus effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers
from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are
used for effect and surround sounds. The center speaker is
for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.).
The main speakers should be high-performance models
and have enough power-handling capacity to accept the
maximum output of your audio system. The other
speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For
precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use the
models of equivalent performance with the main
speakers.
Use of a subwoofer expands your
sound field
It is also possible to further expand your system with the
addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is
effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from
any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE
(low-frequency effect) channel with high fidelity when
playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals. The
YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System is
ideal for natural and lively bass reproduction.
PREPARATION
Speaker placement
Refer to the following diagram when you place the
speakers.
Main speakers
Place the main left and right speakers an equal distance
from the ideal listening position. The distance between
each speaker and each side of the video monitor should
also be the same.
Center speaker
Align the front face of the center speaker with the front
face of your video monitor. Place the speaker as close to
the monitor as possible (such as directly over or under the
monitor) and centrally between the main speakers.
Rear speakers
Place these speakers behind your listening position,
facing slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (6 feet) above the
floor.
Subwoofer
The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because
low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better
to place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it
slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall
reflections.
Note
If you do not use any of effect speakers (rear and/or center),
change the settings of SPEAKER SET items at the SET MENU
to designate the signals to other terminals you connect speakers
to.
CAUTION
Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of
speakers still creates the interference with the monitor,
place the speakers away from the monitor.
Main
speaker (L)
1.8 m (6 feet)
Rear speaker (L)
Rear speaker (R)
Subwoofer
Main speaker (R)Center speaker
0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:39 PM9
10
SPEAKER SETUP
Connecting the speakers
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), + (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are
faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound
will be unnatural and lack bass.
CAUTION
Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit.
Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/
or the speakers.
If necessary, use the SET MENU to change the speaker mode settings according to the number and size of the speakers
in your configuration after you finish connecting your speakers.
Speaker cables
A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables
running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped
differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge.
1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8) of
insulation from each of the speaker cables.
2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable
together to prevent short circuits.
Connecting to the SPEAKERS terminals
1 Unscrew the knob.
2 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side
of each terminal.
3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.
y
(U.S.A., Canada, Australia, China, Korea and General models)
Banana plug connections are also possible. First, tighten the
knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of
the corresponding terminal.
MAIN SPEAKERS terminals
A front speaker system can be connected to these terminals.
REAR SPEAKERS terminals
A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals.
CENTER SPEAKER terminals
A center speaker can be connected to these terminals.
12
10 mm (3/8)
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative ()
2
3
1
Banana plug
(U.S.A. model)
(U.S.A. model)
0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:40 PM10
11
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SPEAKER SETUP
SPEAKERS
DIGITAL
INPUT
6CH INPUT AUDIO
COMPONENT VIDEO
TUNER
AM
ANT
FM
ANT
MONITOR
OUT
D-TV
/CBL
DVD
P
R
/C
R
P
B
/C
B
Y
GND
75 UNBAL.
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEOS VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
S VIDEO
CD
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
D-TV/CBL
DVD
DVD
VCR
IN
OUT
D-TV
/CBL
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
MD
/CD-R
IN
(PLAY)
CD
V-A UX
SUB
WOOFER
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND
CENTER
MAIN
OUT
(REC)
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
OUTPUTAUDIO
MAIN
REAR
(SURROUND)
CENTER
+
+
+
L
R
L
R
L L
R R
AC OUTLETS
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
SET BEFORE POWER ON
MAIN
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
MAIN
: 4
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
1
56
3
2
4
Subwoofer
system
Center
speaker
Right
Rear speaker
SUBWOOFER jack
When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,
connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or
rear channels are directed to this jack in accordance with your SPEAKER SET selections. The LFE (low-frequency
effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed to this jack in accordance with your
SPEAKER SET selections.
Notes
The cut-off frequency of the SUBWOOFER jack is 90 Hz.
If you do not use a subwoofer, designate the signals to the main left and right speakers by changing the setting of SPEAKER SET
item 1D BASS on the SET MENU to MAIN.
Use the control on the subwoofer to adjust its volume level. It is also possible to adjust the volume level by using this units remote
control (see ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS on page 51).
Main speaker
Right Left
Left
1
2
4
3
6
5
The diagram shows the speaker layout in the listening
room.
0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:40 PM11
12
SPEAKER SETUP
SPEAKERS
MAIN
REAR
(SURROUND)
CENTER
+
+
+
L L
R R
SET BEFORE POWER ON
MAIN
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 8
MIN. /SPEAKER
MAIN
: 4
MIN. /SPEAKER
CENTER
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
REAR
: 6
MIN. /SPEAKER
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR
Switch
position
Left
Right
Speaker
Main
Center
Rear
Main
Center
Rear
Impedance level
The impedance of each speaker must
be 4 or higher.
The impedance must be 6 or
higher.
The impedance of each speaker must
be 6 or higher.
The impedance of each speaker must
be 8 or higher.
The impedance must be 8 or
higher.
The impedance of each speaker must
be 8 or higher.
(U.S.A. model)
IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch
WARNING
Do not change setting of the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch when the power of this unit is on, this may damage
the unit. If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE
SELECTOR switch may not be fully slid to either position. If so, slide the switch all the way to either position when
this unit is in the standby mode.
Select the switch position (left or right) according to the impedance of the speakers in your system. Be sure to move this
switch only when this unit is in the standby mode.
0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:40 PM12
13
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONNECTIONS
Before connecting components
CAUTION
Do not connect this unit or other components to the
mains power until all connections between the
components have been completed.
Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to
say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, + to + and “–” to
“–”. Some components require different connection
methods and have different jack names. Refer to the
operation instructions for each component to be
connected to this unit.
When you connect other YAMAHA audio components
(such as a tape deck, MD recorder and CD player or
changer), connect them to the jack with the same
number labels as !, #, $ etc. YAMAHA applies this
labeling system to all its products.
After you have completed all connections, check them
again to make sure they are correct.
The name of jack corresponds to input selector.
Connecting to digital jacks
This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of
digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables.
You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital
and DTS bitstreams. To enjoy multi-channel sound track
of DVD software, etc. with DSP effect, you need to make
digital connection. All digital input jacks are acceptable
for 96-kHz sampling digital signals.
Note
The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard.
If you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this
standard, this unit may not function properly.
SPEAKERS
DIGITAL
INPUT
6CH INPUT AUDIO
COMPONENT VIDEO
TUNER
AM
ANT
FM
ANT
MONITOR
OUT
D-TV
/CBL
DVD
P
R
/C
R
P
B
/C
B
Y
GND
75 UNBAL.
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEOS VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
S VIDEO
CD
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
D-TV/CBL
DVD
DVD
VCR
IN
OUT
D-TV
/CBL
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
MD
/CD-R
IN
(PLAY)
CD
V-A UX
SUB
WOOFER
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND
CENTER
MAIN
OUT
(REC)
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
OUTPUTAUDIO
MAIN
REAR
(SURROUND)
CENTER
+
+
+
L
R
L
R
L L
R R
DIGITAL INPUT jacks
(pages 13-16)
6CH INPUT jacks
(page 18)
Video component jacks
(pages 14-15)
Audio component jacks
(page 16)
SUBWOOFER
OUTPUT jack
(page 11)
AC OUTLETS (page 18)
Antenna input
terminals
(page 17)
SPEAKERS terminals
(pages 10-11)
DIGITAL OUTPUT
jack (page 16)
0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:40 PM13
14
CONNECTIONS
Connecting video components
Refer to the connection examples on the next page.
Types of video jacks
There are three types of video jacks as follows:
1 VIDEO jack
Conventional composite video signal.
2 S VIDEO jack
Transmits color and luminance separately and achives
high-quality color reproduction.
3 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
Transmit color difference (P
B
/C
B
, P
R
/C
R
) and
luminance separately and provide the best quality
picture.
Each type of video jack works independently. Signals
input through the composite video, S-video and
component jacks are only output through the
corresponding composite video, S-video, and
component jacks.
Use a commercially available cable specified for
connecting each type of jacks.
The description of the component video jacks may
differ depending on the component (e.g. Y, C
B
, C
R
/Y,
P
B
, P
R
/Y, B-Y, R-Y etc.). When using these jacks, refer
also to the operation instructions for the component
being connected.
Connecting a video monitor
Connect the video input jack on your video monitor to the
MONITOR OUT VIDEO jack.
Note
If you connect this unit with a source component using S-video
(or Component video) jacks, you also need to connect your
video monitor using S-video (or Component video) jacks.
Connecting a DVD player/digital
TV/cable TV
Connect the optical digital audio signal output jack on
your component to the DIGITAL INPUT jack and
connect the video signal output jack on the component to
the VIDEO jack on this unit.
Then connect AUDIO jacks on your component to the
AUDIO jacks on this unit.
y
If your video component has an S-video output or component
video output, connect the S-video signal output jack on the
component to the S VIDEO jack or connect the component
video signal output jacks on the component to the
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.
The AUDIO jacks are available for a video component which
does not have optical digital output jack. However, multi-
channel reproduction cannot be obtained with audio signals
input from AUDIO jacks.
Connecting another video
component
Connect the audio signal output jacks on your video
component to the AUDIO jacks and connect the video
signal output jack on the component to the VIDEO jack
on this unit.
Connecting a VCR or DVR (digital
video recorder)
Connect the audio signal input jacks on your video
component to the AUDIO OUT jacks and connect the
video signal input jack on the video component to the
VIDEO OUT jack on this unit for picture recording.
Connect the audio signal output jacks on your component
to the AUDIO IN jacks and connect the video signal
output jack on the component to the VIDEO IN jack on
this unit to play a source from your recording component.
y
If your video component has an S-video input, connect the
S-video signal input jack on the component to the S VIDEO
OUT jack.
If your video component has an S-video output, connect the
S-video signal output jack on the component to the S VIDEO
IN jack.
Notes
Once you have connected a recording component to this unit,
keep its power turned on while using this unit. If the power is
off, this unit may distort the sound from other components.
S-video and component video signals pass independently
through this units video circuit. Make sure to connect this unit
to both a source component and a recording component using
the video jacks of the same system.
COMPONENT VIDEO
P
R
/C
R
P
B
/C
B
Y
VIDEOS VIDEO
2 1 3
0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:40 PM14
15
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONNECTIONS
DIGITAL
INPUT
6CH INPUT AUDIO
COMPONENT VIDEO
TUNER
AM
ANT
FM
ANT
MONITOR
OUT
D-TV
/CBL
DVD
P
R
/C
R
P
B
/C
B
Y
GND
75 UNBAL.
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEOS VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
S VIDEO
CD
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
D-TV/CBL
DVD
DVD
VCR
IN
OUT
D-TV
/CBL
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
MD
/CD-R
IN
(PLAY)
CD
V-AUX
SUB
WOOFER
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND
CENTER
MAIN
OUT
(REC)
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
OUTPUTAUDIO
L
R
L
R
VIDEO
INPUT
V
VIDEO
OUTPUT
O
OPTICAL
OUTPUT
V
V V
AUDIO
INPUT
L
R
VIDEO
OUTPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
L
R
AUDIO
OUTPUT
V
VIDEO
OUTPUT
O
OPTICAL
OUTPUT
L
R
AUDIO
OUTPUT
V
AUDIO
OUTPUT
L
R
VIDEO
OUTPUT
L
R
V
O
indicates video cables
indicates optical cables
indicates right analog cables
indicates left analog cables
indicates signal direction
Video monitor
VCR
DVD player
TV/digital TV/
cable TV
Another video
component
0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:40 PM15
16
CONNECTIONS
Connecting audio components
Connecting a CD player
Connect the coaxial digital output jack on your CD player
to the DIGITAL INPUT CD jack.
y
The AUDIO jacks are available for a CD player which does not
have coaxial digital output jack.
Connecting a CD recorder or MD
recorder
Connect the optical digital signal input jack on your CD
recorder or MD recorder to the DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/
CD-R jack for digital recording.
Connect the optical digital output jack on your CD
recorder or MD recorder to the DIGITAL INPUT
MD/CD-R jack to play a source from your recording
component.
C
O
DIGITAL
INPUT
6CH INPUT AUDIO
TUNER
AM
ANT
FM
ANT
GND
75 UNBAL.
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEOS VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
S VIDEO
CD
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
OPTICAL
D-TV/CBL
DVD
DVD
VCR
IN
OUT
D-TV
/CBL
MD/CD-R
MD/CD-R
MD
/CD-R
IN
(PLAY)
CD
V-AUX
SUB
WOOFER
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND
CENTER
MAIN
OUT
(REC)
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
OUTPUTAUDIO
L
R
L
R
O
O
OPTICAL INPUT
OPTICAL OUTPUT
COAXIAL
OUTPUT
C
indicates signal direction
CD player
CD recorder or
MD recorder
y
The AUDIO jacks are available for an CD recorder or MD
recorder which does not have optical digital input or output
jack.
Notes
Once you have connected a recording component to this unit,
keep its power turned on while using this unit. If the power is
off, this unit may distort the sound from other components.
DIGITAL OUTPUT jack and analog OUT (REC) jacks are
independent. Only digital signals are output from DIGITAL
OUTPUT jack and analog signals from OUT (REC) jacks.
indicates coaxial cables
indicates optical cables
0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:40 PM16
17
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONNECTIONS
TUNER
AM
ANT
FM
ANT
MONIT
O
OU
T
D-TV
/CBL
DVD
GND
75 UNBAL.
E
O
VIDEO
VIDEO
R
OUT
FREQUENCY
STEP
100kHz/10kHz
FREQUENCY
STEP
50kHz/9kHz
FM/AM
Ground (GND terminal)
For maximum safety and minimum
interference, connect the antenna GND
terminal to a good earth ground. A good
earth ground is a metal stake driven into
moist earth.
Indoor FM
antenna
(included)
AM loop antenna
(included)
Connecting the antennas
Connecting the AM loop antenna
1 Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it.
2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop
antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and
GND terminals.
3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the best
reception.
Notes
The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.
The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.
A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer
reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor
reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the
quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA
dealer or service center about the outdoor antennas.
FREQUENCY STEP switch (China and General
models)
Because the interstation frequency spacing
differs in different areas, set the
FREQUENCY STEP switch (located on
the rear panel) according to the frequency
spacing in your area.
North, Central and South America:
100 kHz/10 kHz
Other area: 50 kHz/9 kHz
Before setting this switch, disconnect the
AC power plug of this unit from the AC
outlet.
Open the cover of the
included 75-ohm/300-ohm
antenna adapter.
Cut the external sleeve
of the 75-ohm coaxial
cable and prepare it for
connection.
Cut the lead wire and
remove it.
Insert the cable wire into the
slot, and clamp it with pliers.
Snap the cover into
place.
12
Unit: mm
(inch)
3
Lead wire
4
Clamp with
pliers.
Clamp
with
pliers.
Insert the wire
into the slot.
5
Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this
unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient
signal strength.
Connect each antenna correctly to the designated
terminals.
75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model)
11 (7/16)
8 (5/16)
6 (1/14)
0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:40 PM17
18
CONNECTIONS
Connecting an external decoder
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (MAIN
left and right, CENTER, SURROUND left and right and
SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from an
external decoder, sound processor, or pre-amplifier.
Connect the output jacks on your external decoder to the
6CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right
outputs to the left and right input jacks for the main and
surround channels.
Notes
When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, this unit
automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and
you cannot listen to DSP programs.
When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, settings of
1 SPEAKER SET on the SET MENU do not apply (except
for 1E MAIN Lv).
VO LTAGE
SELECTOR
SWITCHED
50W MAX. TOTAL
AC OUTLETS
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(General model)
Connecting the power supply
cords
Connecting the AC power cord
Plug in this unit to the wall outlet.
AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED)
U.S.A., Canada, China, Europe, Singapore and
General models ..............................................2 OUTLETS
U.K. and Australia model ................................ 1 OUTLET
Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your
components to this unit. The power to the AC OUTLETS
is controlled by this units STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM
POWER and STANDBY). These outlets will supply
power to any source component connected to this unit
whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power
(total power consumption of components) that can be
connected to the AC OUTLETS varies depending on the
area which it was purchasing.
China and General models......................................... 50 W
Other models ........................................................... 100 W
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(China and General models)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit
must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE
plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/
220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.
0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:40 PM18
19
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CONNECTIONS
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
SILENT
PHONES
STEREO
EFFECT
PROGRAM
PRESET
/
TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
BASS
+ +
TREBLE
INPUT
INPUT M0DE
6CH INPUT
VOLUME
STANDBY
/
ON
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING MODE
1
1
POWER
SLEEP
CODE SET
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
TV INPUTTV MUTE
VOLUME
MUTE
AMP
POWER POWER
AVTV
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
+
+
+
TV CHTV VOL
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
B
STANDBY
/ON
POWER
SYSTEM
or
Remote control
Front panel
Turning on the power
When all connections are complete, turn on the power of
this unit.
1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on
the remote control) to turn on the power of
this unit.
The level of the main volume, and then the current
DSP program name appear on the front panel display.
2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:40 PM19
20
Item
1A CENTER
1B MAIN
1C REAR LR
1D BASS
1E MAIN Lv
Description
Sets center speaker availability and size.
Sets main speaker size.
Sets rear L/R speakers availability and size.
Sets the speaker(s) to be used to output low bass signals.
Sets the main speaker level.
Possible settings (default
setting indicated in bold)
LRG/SML/NON
LARGE/SMALL
LRG/SML/NON
SWFR/MAIN/BOTH
Nrm (Normal)/10 dB
SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS
This unit has 5 SPEAKER SET items on the SET MENU that you must set according to the number of speakers in your
configuration and their size. The following table summarizes these SPEAKER SET items, and shows the initial settings
as well as other possible settings.
If the initial settings shown in the following table are not appropriate for your speaker configuration,
see 1 SPEAKER SET on pages 43-44 to change the settings.
Summary of SPEAKER SET items 1A through 1E
0104V530_20-22_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:40 PM20
21
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
This section explains how to adjust speaker output levels
using the test tone generator. When this adjustment is
complete, the output level heard at the listening position
should be the same from each speaker. This is important
for best performance of the digital sound field processor,
and the various decoders (Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro
Logic, Dolby Pro Logic
and DTS).
Note
Since this unit cannot enter the test mode while headphones are
connected to this unit, be sure to unplug the headphones from
the PHONES jack when using the test tone.
Using the test tone
Use the test tone to balance the output levels of the
speakers. The adjustment of each speaker output level
should be made at your listening position using the
remote control.
1 Press AMP.
2 Press TEST to output the
test tone.
TEST
RETURN
BASS
+
TREBLE
+
SET MENU
SELECT
PRESET/CH
TV INPUTTV MUTE
A/B/C/D/E
VOLUME
LEVEL
MENU
TEST
STEREO
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
TITLE
MUTE
AMP
VCR
A
+
+
+
+
TV CHTV VOL
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
B
2,5
4
1
3
ADJUSTING SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
SILENT
PHONES
STEREO
EFFECT
PROGRAM
PRESET
/
TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
BASS
+ +
TREBLE
INPUT
INPUT M0DE
6CH INPUT
VOLUME
STANDBY
/
ON
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING MODE
3
3
VOLUME
+
VOLUME
Remote control
Front panel
or
3 Set the BASS and TREBLE controls on the
front panel to the center position and adjust
the volume of this unit so you can hear the
test tone.
The test tone is heard (in order) from the main left
speaker, center speaker, main right speaker, rear right
speaker, rear left speaker, and the subwoofer. The
tone is produced for 2.5 seconds from each speaker.
* Subwoofer test tone is output after the rear left
speaker (LEFT SURROUND).
The front panel display shows which speaker is
outputting the test tone.
Note
If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set this
unit to standby mode and check the speaker connections.
L SUR. R SUR.
CENTER
RIGHT
LEFT
*SUBWOOFER
AMP
0104V530_20-22_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:40 PM21
22
ADJUSTING SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS
4 Adjust the level of the
effect speakers using j / i
so that it matches the
level of the main
speakers.
While adjusting, the test tone
is heard from the selected
speaker.
Note
To adjust the level of the main speakers, use VOLUME knob
(or VOLUME +/ on the remote control).
5 When adjustment is
complete, press TEST to
stop the test tone.
Notes
If 1A CENTER on the SET MENU is set to NON and the
center speaker is not connected, the center channel sound is
automatically output from the main left and right speakers.
If 1C REAR LR on the SET MENU is set to NON, the
output level of the rear left and right speakers cannot be
adjusted in step 4. The test tone will be circulated skipping the
rear right and left speakers.
If 1D BASS on the SET MENU is set to MAIN, the test tone
will be circulated skipping the subwoofer.
y
It is not necessary to readjust the speaker levels once they are
set (as long as you do not change the speakers). You can enjoy
listening to or watching the input source at the desired volume
simply by adjusting the VOLUME knob (or VOLUME +/ on
the remote control).
If the output level of the effect speakers (center, rear left, and
rear right) cannot be increased enough to match the level of the
main speakers, set 1E MAIN Lv on SET MENU to 10 dB
(see page 44). This setting decreases the main speaker output
level to about one-third of the normal level. After you have set
1E MAIN Lv on the SET MENU to 10 dB, adjust the levels
for the center and rear speakers again.
SELECT
PRESET/CH
+
TEST
RETURN
0104V530_20-22_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:40 PM22
23
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
BASIC PLAYBACK
1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on
the remote control) to turn on the power.
2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
3 Press INPUT l / h repeatedly (one of the
input selector buttons on the remote control)
to select the input source.
The selected input source name and input mode
appear on the front panel display for a few seconds.
To select the audio source connected to the 6CH
INPUT jacks
(When combining with a video source)
You need to select the input to which the video source
component is connected before selecting audio source.
Press 6CH INPUT until 6CH INPUT appears on the
front panel display.
Note
If 6CH INPUT is shown on the front panel display, no other
source can be played. To select another input source, first press
6CH INPUT to turn off 6CH INPUT from the front panel
display.
INPUT
POWER
SLEEP
CODE SET
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
TV INPUTTV MUTE
VOLUME
STEREO
EFFECT
MUTE
AMP
POWER POWER
AVTV
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
+
+
+
TV CHTV VOL
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
B
6
1
33
5
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
VCR
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
LR
VOLUME
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER CD
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
SILENT
PHONES
STEREO
EFFECT
PROGRAM
PRESET
/
TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
BASS
+ +
TREBLE
INPUT
INPUT M0DE
6CH INPUT
VOLUME
STANDBY
/
ON
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING MODE
1
353
5
6
STANDBY
/ON
POWER
SYSTEM
or
or
Remote control
Remote control
Front panel
Front panel
Selected input source
6CH INPUT
6CH INPUT
Remote controlFront panel
or
0105V530_23-28_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:41 PM23
24
BASIC PLAYBACK
4 Start playback or select a broadcast station
on the source component.
Refer to the operation instructions for the
component.
5 Adjust the volume to the desired level.
The volume level is displayed digitally.
Example: 70 dB
Control range: VOLUME MUTE (minimum) to
0 dB (maximum)
The volume level indicator also shows the current
volume level as a bar graph.
If desired, use BASS and TREBLE. These controls
only effect the sound from the main speakers.
Notes
If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-
frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the
center and rear speakers may not match that of the main left
and right speakers.
If you have connected a recording component to the VCR
OUT, or MD/CD-R OUT jacks, and you notice distortion or
low volume during playback of other components, try turning
the recording component on.
6 Select a DSP program if desired.
Use PROGRAM l / h (DSP program buttons on
the remote control) to select a DSP program. See
pages 29 to 33 for details about DSP programs.
When using the remote control, press AMP before
selecting a DSP program.
SLEEP
6CH INPUT
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
AMP
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
B
VOLUME
+
VOLUME
BASS
+
TREBLE
+
Front panel
or
Remote control
BGV (background video) function
The BGV function allows you to enjoy video images
from a video source together with sounds from an audio
source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical
music while having beautiful scenery from a video source
on the video monitor.
Select a source from the video group, then select a source
from the audio group using the input selector buttons on
the remote control. BGV selections cannot be made with
INPUT l / h on the front panel.
To mute the sound
1 Press MUTE on the
remote control.
To resume the audio output,
press MUTE again.
y
You can also cancel mute by pressing VOLUME +/, etc.
During muting, the MUTE indicator flashes on the front
panel display.
When you have finished using
this unit
1 Press STANDBY/ON (STANDBY on the
remote control) to set this unit in the
standby mode.
PROGRAM
or
STEREO
EFFECT
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
Front panel Remote control
STANDBY
/ON
or
STANDBY
Front panel
Remote control
MUTE
0105V530_23-28_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:41 PM24
25
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
BASIC PLAYBACK
Input modes and indications
This unit comes with a variety input jacks. You can select
the type of input signals you desire.
Each time you turn on the power of this unit, the input
mode is set according to 8 INPUT MODE setting on
the SET MENU (see page 47 for details).
1 Press INPUT MODE (the input selector
button that you have pressed to select the
input source on the remote control)
repeatedly until the desired input mode is
shown on the front panel display.
AUTO: In this mode, the input signal is selected
automatically as follows:
1) Digital signal
2) Analog signal
DTS: In this mode, only the digital input signal
encoded with DTS is selected, even if
another signal is input at the same time.
ANALOG: In this mode, only the analog input signal is
selected, even if a digital signal is input at
the same time.
Notes
When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the
type of signal. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS
signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate
setting.
When playing a disc encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS on
some LD or DVD players, the sound output delays for a
moment when playback resumes after a search because the
digital signal is selected again.
When playing a LD source that has not been digitally recorded,
the sound may not be output for some LD players. In this case,
set the input mode to ANALOG.
INPUT MODE
DVD AUTO
LR
VOLUME
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER CD
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
SLEEP
6CH INPUT
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
AMP
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
B
Remote controlFront panel
or
Input mode
Notes on 96-kHz sampling digital
signals
The digital input jacks of this unit can handle 96-kHz
sampling digital signals. Note the following when 96-kHz
sampling digital signal is input to this unit:
DSP programs cannot be selected.
Sound will be output as 2-channel stereo from only the
main left and right speakers. (There may be sound
output from the subwoofer depending on the
SPEAKER MODE settings on the SET MENU.)
Therefore, the level of the effect speakers cannot be
adjusted while listening to such a source.
Notes on playing DTS-CD/LDs
If the digital output data of the player has been
processed in any way, you may not be able to perform
DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection
between this unit and the player.
If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and
set the input mode to ANALOG, this unit may
reproduce the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. In
this case, connect the source to a digital input jack and
set the input mode to AUTO or DTS.
If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while
playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit
reproduces no sound.
If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal with
the input mode set to AUTO;
This unit automatically switches to the DTS-
decoding mode (The t indicator lights up) after
having detected the DTS signal. When playback of
the DTS source is completed, the t indicator
may flash. While this indicator is flashing, only DTS
source can be played. If you want to play a normal
PCM source soon, set the input mode back to AUTO.
When the input mode is set to AUTO and a search or
skip operation is performed during playback of a
DTS source, the t indicator may flash. If this
status continues for longer than 30 seconds, this unit
will automatically switch from DTS-decoding
mode to PCM digital signal input mode. The t
indicator will turn off.
0105V530_23-28_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:41 PM25
26
BASIC PLAYBACK
Selecting a sound field program
You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a
DSP program. For details about each program, see pages
29 to 33.
1 Press AMP.
2 Press one of the DSP program buttons on
the remote control to select the desired
program.
The name of the selected program appears on the
front panel display.
AMP
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
SILENT
PHONES
STEREO
EFFECT
PROGRAM
PRESET
/
TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
BASS
+ +
TREBLE
INPUT
INPUT M0DE
6CH INPUT
VOLUME
STANDBY
/
ON
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING MODE
PROGRAM l / h
POWER
SLEEP
CODE SET
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
TV INPUTTV MUTE
VOLUME
STEREO
EFFECT
MUTE
AMP
POWER POWER
AVTV
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
+
+
+
TV CHTV VOL
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
B
1
2,3
3 After selecting the desired program, press
the same button repeatedly to select the
desired sub-program if available.
Example: Pressing MOVIE THEATER 1 repeatedly
switches the sub-program between
Sci-Fi and Spectacle.
Notes
There are 9 programs with sub-programs available with this
unit. However, the selection depends on the input signal format
and not all sub-programs can be used with all input signal
formats.
The digital sound field processor cannot be used when a source
connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit is selected or
when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit.
The acoustics of your listening room affect the DSP program.
Minimize the sound reflections in your room to maximize the
effect created by the program.
When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects
the last DSP program used with that source.
When you set this unit in the standby mode, the current source
and DSP program are memorized and are automatically
selected when you turn on the power again.
If a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input when the input mode
is set to AUTO, the DSP program (No. 79) automatically
switches to the appropriate decoding program.
When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/
Normal or PRO LOGIC/Enhanced, or PRO LOGIC Movie,
no sound will be heard from the main speakers and the rear
speakers. Sound can only be heard from the center speaker. (If
1A CENTER on the SET MENU is set to NON, the center
channel sound is output from the main speakers.)
y
You can also select DSP program by pressing PROGRAM
l / h on the front panel.
Select a program based on your listening preference. Program
names are just for reference.
Sub-program name
Program name
DGTL Spectacle
RL
LCR
RR
LFE
DSP
DIGITAL
VOLUME
MOVIE
THTR
1
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER CD
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
STEREO
EFFECT
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
STEREO
EFFECT
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
Program name
Sub-program name
0105V530_23-28_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:41 PM26
27
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
BASIC PLAYBACK
4 Press SELECT repeatedly to select the
decoder; PRO LOGIC or PRO LOGIC
.
5 After selecting on the decoder (PRO LOGIC
), select the mode appropriate for the
source by pressing q/DTS SUR.
The selection switches as follow;
PRO LOGIC
Movie PRO LOGIC Music
y
You can select PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC Movie, and PRO
LOGIC Music by pressing PROGRAM l / h on the front
panel repeatedly.
Selecting PRO LOGIC
You can enjoy the 2-channel sources decoded into five
discrete channels by selecting PRO LOGIC
in program
No. 9.
1 Select a 2-channel source and start playback
on the source component.
2 Press AMP.
3 Press q/DTS SUR.
The previously selected sub program appears on the
front panel display.
PRO LOGIC
LR
DSP
PRO LOGIC
/
VOLUME
PRO
LOGIC
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER CD
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
STEREO
EFFECT
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
Remote control
STEREO
EFFECT
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
STEREO
EFFECT
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
SILENT
PHONES
STEREO
EFFECT
PROGRAM
PRESET
/
TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
BASS
+ +
TREBLE
INPUT
INPUT M0DE
6CH INPUT
VOLUME
STANDBY
/
ON
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING MODE
PROGRAM l / h
POWER
SLEEP
CODE SET
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
TV INPUTTV MUTE
VOLUME
STEREO
EFFECT
MUTE
AMP
POWER POWER
AVTV
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
+
+
+
TV CHTV VOL
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
B
2
3,4,5
AMP
0105V530_23-28_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:41 PM27
28
BASIC PLAYBACK
Playing Dolby Digital Surround
EX or DTS ES software
Press MATRIX 6.1 to turn on the Dolby Digital + Matrix
6.1 or DTS + Matrix 6.1 decoder.
The display changes AUTO Matrix6.1 OFF each
time the MATRIX 6.1 button is pressed.
AUTO: This mode automatically switches Dolby
Digital + Matrix 6.1 and DTS + Matrix 6.1
depending on the signal. Virtual rear center
speaker does not work for 5.1 channel
sources.
Matrix6.1: This setting produces 6-channel playback of
the input source using the Matrix 6.1
decoder. The virtual rear center speaker can
be used when playing a 5.1-channel source.
OFF: Virtual rear center speaker does not work in
this setting.
Notes
The setting becomes AUTO once this unit turns into standby
mode.
Some Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS ES software may not
contain the signal that is necessary for this unit to switch to the
Matrix 6.1 decoding mode. To turn on the Matrix 6.1 decoder
when playing such a source, select Matrix6.1.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
With Virtual CINEMA DSP, you can enjoy all DSP
programs without rear speakers. It creates virtual speakers
to reproduce a natural sound field.
You can listen to virtual CINEMA DSP by setting 1C
REAR LR in the SET MENU to NON. Sound field
processing changes to VIRTUAL CINEMA DSP
automatically.
Note
This unit is not set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if
1C REAR LR is set to NON in the following cases:
when the 5ch Stereo, DOLBY DIGITAL Normal, Pro Logic
Normal, Pro Logic , or DTS Normal program is selected;
when the sound effect is turned off;
when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source;
when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit;
when using the test tone; or
when connecting the headphones.
MATRIX 6.1
+10
The MATRIX indicator lights up.
STEREO
EFFECT
ENTER
STEREO
EFFECT
Front panel
or
Remote control
Spectacle 6.1
DSP
MATRIX
DIGITAL
MOVIE
THTR
1
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
SELECT
PRESET/CH
+
SILENT CINEMA DSP
You can enjoy a powerful sound field similar to what you
could expert from actual speakers with SILENT
CINEMA DSP. You can listen to SILENT CINEMA DSP
by connecting your headphones to the PHONES jack
while the digital sound field processor is on. Enjoy all the
DSP program using the headphones. The SILENT
indicator lights up on the front panel display. (When
sound effects are off, you listen to the source with normal
stereo reproduction.)
Notes
This feature is not available when 6CH INPUT is selected or
96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit.
The sound of LFE channel will be mixed and output from the
headphone.
Normal Stereo Reproduction
1 Press STEREO to turn off the sound effect
for normal stereo reproduction.
Press STEREO again to turn the sound effect back
on.
Notes
If you turn off the sound effects, no sound is output from the
center speaker, rear speakers.
If you turn off the sound effects while a Dolby Digital or DTS
signal is being output, the dynamic range of the signal is
automatically compressed and the sounds of the center and rear
speaker channels are mixed and output from the main speakers.
The volume may be greatly reduced when you turn off the
sound effects or if you set 4 D. RANGE on the SET MENU
to MIN. In this case turn on the sound effect.
The sound of LFE channel will be directed to the main left and
right or the subwoofer (or both) channels depending on the
setting of 1D BASS on the SET MENU.
y
During stereo reproduction, you can display information such as
the type, format and sampling frequency of the signal input from
the components connected to this unit.
(While playing a source)
1 Press AMP.
2 Press d to display the information about the
input signal.
0105V530_23-28_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:41 PM28
BASIC
OPERATION
29
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP)
Understanding sound fields
A sound field is defined as the characteristic sound reflections of a
particular space. In concert halls and other music venues, we hear
early reflections and reverberations as well as the direct sound
produced by the artist(s). The variations in the early reflections and
other reverberations among the different music venues is what gives
each venue its special and recognizable sound quality.
YAMAHA sent teams of sound engineers all around the world to
measure the sound reflections of famous concert halls and music
venues, and collect detailed sound field information such as the
direction, strength, range, and delay time of those reflections. Then
we stored this enormous amount of data in the ROM chips of this
unit.
Recreating a sound field
Recreating the sound field of a concert hall or an opera house requires localizing the virtual sound sources in your
listening room. The traditional stereo system that uses only two speakers is not capable of recreating a realistic sound
field. YAMAHAs DSP requires three effect speakers to recreate sound fields based on the measured sound field data.
The processor controls the strength and delay time of the signals output from the three effect speakers to localize the
virtual sound sources and fully encompass the listener.
Hi-Fi DSP programs
The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in
mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments.
No.
1
2
3
4
Program
CONCERT HALL
JAZZ CLUB
ROCK CONCERT
ENTERTAINMENT/
Disco
ENTERTAINMENT/
5ch Stereo
Features
A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections from all directions
emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great deal of presence, and your virtual
seat is near the center, close to the stage.
This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club, that
seats up to 300 people. Its wide left to right seating arrangement offers a real and vibrant sound.
The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at
LAs hottest rock club. The listeners virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall.
This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The
sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-energy, immediate
sound.
Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for
background music at parties, etc.
0106V530_29-33_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:42 PM29
30
CINEMA-DSP
Sound design of CINEMA-DSP
Filmmakers intend for the dialog to be located right on the screen, the effect sound a little farther back, the music spread
even farther back, and the surround sound around the listener. Of course, all of these sounds must be synchronized with
the images on the screen.
CINEMA-DSP is an upgraded version of YAMAHA DSP specially designed for movie soundtracks. CINEMA-DSP
integrates the DTS, Dolby Digital, and Dolby Pro Logic surround sound technologies with YAMAHA DSP sound field
programs to provide a surround sound field. It recreates comprehensive movie sound design in your audio room. In
CINEMA-DSP sound field programs, YAMAHAs exclusive DSP processing is added to the Main left and right, and
Center channels, so the listener can enjoy realistic dialogue, depth of sound, smooth transition between sound sources,
and a surround sound field that goes beyond the screen.
When a DTS or Dolby Digital signal is detected, the CINEMA-DSP sound field processor automatically chooses the
most suitable sound field program for that signal.
L SURROUND SOUND FIELD
R SURROUND SOUND FIELD
PRESENCE SOUND FIELD
DIALOG
EFFECT MUSIC
In addition to the DSP, this unit is equipped with a variety of precise decoders; Dolby Pro Logic decoder for Dolby
Surround sources, Dolby Pro Logic
decoder for Dolby Surround and 2-channel sources, Dolby Digital/DTS decoder
for multi-channel sources and Dolby Digital + Matrix 6.1 or DTS + Matrix 6.1 decoder for adding a rear center channel
(the rear center channel is outputted from virtual rear center speaker). You can select CINEMA-DSP programs to
optimize these decoders and the DSP sound patterns depending on the input source.
0106V530_29-33_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:43 PM30
31
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CINEMA-DSP
The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without
using matrix processing. This units MOVIE THEATER programs provide the same quality of sound and sound
localization that 6-channel soundtracks do. The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality
sound designed for movie theaters into your home. With this units MOVIE THEATER programs, you can use Dolby
Digital or DTS technology to recreate a dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being in a public theater.
Dolby Digital/DTS + DSP sound field effect
These programs use YAMAHAs tri-field DSP processing
on each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front,
left surround, and right surround channels. This
processing enables this unit to reproduce the immense
sound field and surround expression of a Dolby Digital-
or DTS-equipped movie theater without sacrificing the
clear separation of all channels.
Dolby Digital/DTS + Matrix 6.1 + DSP sound field effect
These programs provide you with the maximum experience of the spacious surround effects by adding an extra rear
center DSP sound field created from the virtual rear center speaker.
Dolby Pro Logic + DSP sound field effect
Most movie software has 4-channel (left, center, right,
and surround) sound information encoded by Dolby
Surround matrix processing and stored on the left and
right tracks. These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro
Logic decoder. The MOVIE THEATER programs are
designed to recreate the spaciousness and delicate
nuances of sound that tend to be lost in the encoding and
decoding processes.
Dolby Pro Logic
Dolby Pro Logic decodes Dolby Surround software into 5 discrete full-range channels (3 channels in front and 2
channels in rear). There are 2 modes; MOVIE for movies and MUSIC for 2-channel audio sources.
Surround DSP
sound field
Right surround DSP
sound field
Presence DSP
sound field
Left surround DSP
sound field
Presence DSP
sound field
0106V530_29-33_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:43 PM31
32
CINEMA-DSP
CINEMA-DSP programs
For movie programs: No. 7 to 9
This unit automatically chooses the appropriate decoder and DSP sound field pattern according to the input signal
format.
Table of Program Names for Each Input Format
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
DOLBY
DIGITAL
DTS DIGITAL
SUR
PRO LOGIC
PRO LOGIC
2 channel
Stereo
70 mm Spectacle
70 mm Sci-Fi
70 mm Adventure
70 mm General
Normal
Enhanced
Movie
Music
DOLBY DIGITAL
DGTL Spectacle
DGTL Sci-Fi
DGTL Adventure
DGTL General
Normal
Enhanced
5.1 channel
DTS
DTS Spectacle
DTS Sci-Fi
DTS Adventure
DTS General
Normal
Enhanced
DTS
Matrix 6.1
Spectacle 6.1
Sci-Fi 6.1
Adventure 6.1
General 6.1
Matrix 6.1
Enhanced 6.1
6.1 channel *
Input
Program
DOLBY DIGITAL
Matrix 6.1
Spectacle 6.1
Sci-Fi 6.1
Adventure 6.1
General 6.1
Matrix 6.1
Enhanced 6.1
* means the Matrix 6.1 decoder is ON.
y
If a Dolby Digital signal or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program will automatically switch to
the Dolby Digital playback sound field or DTS playback sound field.
If Dolby Digital Surround EX software or DTS ES software is played when AUTO is selected by pressing the MATRIX 6.1 button
on the remote control, the Dolby Digital + Matrix 6.1 or DTS + Matrix 6.1 decoder usually turns on and the corresponding DSP
program is selected.
MATRIX 6.1 on the remote control can be used to play Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel sources with the virtual rear center
speaker. In this case the program name changes to the corresponding name for 6.1 channel.
When playing a 6.1 channel source with MATRIX 6.1 on the remote control turned off, the program name changes to the
corresponding name for 5.1 channel.
Notes
The indicator does not light up when selecting program No. 9 except in Enhanced mode.
When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, main and rear
speakers output effect sounds.
No.
7
8
9
0106V530_29-33_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:43 PM32
33
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
CINEMA-DSP
Program
Enhanced Mode
No.
4
5
6
Program
ENTERTAINMENT/
Game
ENTERTAINMENT/
Concert Video
TV SPORTS
MONO MOVIE
Features
This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds.
This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to concert video sounds.
With this program, you can enjoy watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows,
music programs or sports programs. In a stereo broadcast of a sports game, the commentator is
oriented at the center position, and the shouts and the atmosphere in the stadium spread on the
surround side, while their spread to the rear is properly restrained.
This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The
program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth by using only the presence
sound field.
For audio-video sources: No. 4 to 6
The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in
mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. Select the DSP program that you
feel sounds best regardless of the name and description given for it below.
No.
7
8
9
Features
This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It
precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound
field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby
Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions).
This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form of
science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid the
silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes
Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced
techniques.
This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm
and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the
newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as
much as possible.
This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films,
and is characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is
relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the
echo effect of conversations without losing clarity.
This program ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of the 35-mm film
theaters. Dolby Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or DTS decoding and digital
sound field processing create precise effects without altering the original sound
orientation.
The surround effects produced by this sound field wrap around the viewer naturally from
the back to the left and right, and toward the screen.
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
Spectacle
Sci-Fi
Adventure
General
0106V530_29-33_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:43 PM33
34
TUNING
4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin
automatic tuning.
Press h to tune in to a higher frequency, or press l
to tune in to a lower frequency.
When tuned in to a station, the TUNED indicator
lights up and the frequency of the received station is
shown on the front panel display.
y
Use the manual tuning method if the tuning search does not
stop at the desired station because the signal is weak.
Manual tuning
If the signal from the station you want to select is weak,
you must tune in to it manually.
1 Select TUNER and the reception band
following steps 1 and 2 described in
Automatic tuning at left.
2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MANL MONO)
so that the AUTO indicator goes off from
the front panel display.
If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display,
press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off.
3 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune in to
the desired station manually.
Hold down the button to
continue the tuning search.
Note
Manually tuning in to an FM station will automatically change
the reception mode to monaural to increase the signal quality.
Automatic and manual tuning
There are 2 ways to tune; automatic and manual.
Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are
strong and there is no interference.
Automatic tuning
1 Press INPUT l / h (TUNER on the remote
control) to select TUNER as the input source.
2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.
FM or AM appears on the front panel display.
3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MANL MONO)
so that the AUTO indicator lights up on the
front panel display.
If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display,
press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off.
INPUT
PRESET
/
TUNING
233
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
SILENT
PHONES
STEREO
EFFECT
PROGRAM
PRESET
/
TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
BASS
+ +
TREBLE
INPUT
INPUT M0DE
6CH INPUT
VOLUME
STANDBY
/
ON
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING MODE
4
1
FM/AM
or
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING MODE
AUTO
Lights up
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
POWER
SLEEP
STANDBY
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
AMP
POWER POWER
AVTV
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
B
or
Front panel
Remote control
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING MODE
AUTO
Goes off
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
PRESET
/
TUNING
A AM 144O
TUNED
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
A AM 144O
TUNED
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
A AM 144O
TUNED
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
0107V530_34-41_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:44 PM34
35
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
TUNING
Presetting stations
Automatically presetting stations
(for FM stations)
You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store
FM stations. This function enables this unit to
automatically tune in to FM stations with strong signals,
and to store up to 40 (8 stations x 5 groups) of those
stations in order. This feature enables you to easily tune in
to any preset station by selecting the preset station
number (see page 37).
1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band.
2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MANL MONO)
so that the AUTO indicator lights up on the
front panel display.
3 Press and hold MEMORY (MANL/AUTO FM)
for more than 3 seconds.
The preset number and the MEMORY and
AUTO indicators flash. Then, after about
5 seconds, automatic preset tuning begins from the
frequency currently displayed toward the higher
frequencies.
When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front
panel display shows the frequency of the last preset
station.
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING MODE
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO
A1:FM
LR
MEMORY
AUTO
VOLUME
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER CD
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
SILENT
PHONES
STEREO
EFFECT
PROGRAM
PRESET
/
TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
BASS
+ +
TREBLE
INPUT
INPUT M0DE
6CH INPUT
VOLUME
STANDBY
/
ON
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING MODE
1
23
Lights up
Notes
Any stored station data existing under a preset number is
cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.
When a station data is stored under a preset number, the
frequency and reception band are also stored.
You can manually replace a preset station with another FM or
AM station by simply following the procedure in the section
Manually presetting stations on page 36.
If the number of the received stations does not reach E8,
automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after
searching all stations.
Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored
automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you
want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it manually
in the monaural mode, and store it by following the procedure
in Manually presetting stations on page 36.
Automatic preset tuning options
You can select the preset number from which this unit
will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower
frequencies. After pressing MEMORY in step 3:
1. Press A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h to
select the preset number under which the first station
will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when
stations have all been stored up to E8.
2. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon
(:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin
tuning toward lower frequencies.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby
mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC
outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to
power failure. However, if the power is cut for more
than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If
so, store the stations again.
FM/AM
0107V530_34-41_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:44 PM35
36
TUNING
Manually presetting stations
You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5
groups) manually.
1 Tune in to a station.
See page 34 for tuning instructions.
When tuned in to a station, the front panel display
shows the frequency of received station.
2 Press MEMORY (MANL/AUTO FM).
The MEMORY indicator flashes for about
5 seconds.
3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset
station group (A to E) while the MEMORY
indicator is flashing.
The group letter appears and make sure that the
colon (:) appears on the front panel display.
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
A/B/C/D/E
C :AM 63O kHz
LR
TUNED
MEMORY
VOLUME
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER CD
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
4
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
SILENT
PHONES
STEREO
EFFECT
PROGRAM
PRESET
/
TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
BASS
+ +
TREBLE
INPUT
INPUT M0DE
6CH INPUT
VOLUME
STANDBY
/
ON
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING MODE
32,5
Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3.
Flashes
4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a
preset station number (1 to 8) while the
MEMORY indicator is flashing.
Press h to select a higher preset station number.
Press l to select a lower preset station number.
5 Press MEMORY (MANL/AUTO FM) on the
front panel while the MEMORY indicator is
flashing.
The station band and
frequency appear on the front
panel display with the preset
group and number you have
selected.
6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations.
Notes
Any stored station data existing under a preset number is
cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.
The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with
the station frequency.
A AM 63O kHz
LR
TUNED
VOLUME
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER CD
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
PRESET
/
TUNING
C3:AM 63O kHz
LR
TUNED
MEMORY
VOLUME
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER CD
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
C3:AM 63O kHz
LR
TUNED
VOLUME
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER CD
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
0107V530_34-41_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:44 PM36
37
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
TUNING
Exchanging preset stations
You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations.
The example below describes the procedure for
exchanging preset station E1 with A5.
1 Tune in to preset station E1 by using the
A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h.
See Tuning in to a preset station at left.
2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for
more than 3 seconds.
E1 and the MEMORY indicator flash on the
front panel display.
3 Tune in to preset station A5 by using the
A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h.
A5 and the MEMORY indicator flash on the
front panel display.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again.
The stations stored at the two preset assignments are
exchanged.
Tuning in to a preset station
You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the
preset station number under which it was stored.
1 Press A/B/C/D/E (A/B/C/D/E on the remote
control) to select the preset station group.
The preset group letter appears on the front panel
display and changes each time you press A/B/C/D/E.
2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET
u / d on the remote control) to select a
preset station number (1 to 8).
The preset group and number appear on the front
panel display along with the station band, frequency
and the TUNED indicator lights up.
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
SELECT
PRESET/CH
+
PRESET
/
TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
SET MENU
A/B/C/D/E
MENU
A5:FM 9O.6 MHz
LR
TUNED
MEMORY
VOLUME
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER CD
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
EDIT E1-A5
MEMORY
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER CD
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
Shows the exchange of stations has
been completed.
Front panel
Remote control
or
Front panel
Remote control
or
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
SILENT
PHONES
STEREO
EFFECT
PROGRAM
PRESET
/
TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
BASS
+ +
TREBLE
INPUT
INPUT M0DE
6CH INPUT
VOLUME
STANDBY
/
ON
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING MODE
1
2
1
2
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
SELECT
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
LEVEL
MENU
TEST
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
TITLE
+
2,4 1,3 1,3
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
SILENT
PHONES
STEREO
EFFECT
PROGRAM
PRESET
/
TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
BASS
+ +
TREBLE
INPUT
INPUT M0DE
6CH INPUT
VOLUME
STANDBY
/
ON
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING MODE
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
E1:FM 87.5 MHz
TUNED
MEMORY
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER CD
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
E1:FM 87.5 MHz
TUNED
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER CD
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
0107V530_34-41_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:45 PM37
38
Description of RDS data
This unit can receive, PS, PTY, RT, CT, and EON data
when receiving RDS broadcasting stations.
PS (Program Service name)
mode:
The name of the RDS station being received is displayed.
PTY (Program Type) mode:
There are 15 program types to classify RDS stations.
RT (Radio Text) mode:
Information about the program (such as the title of the
song, name of the singer, etc.) on the RDS station being
received is displayed by a maximum of 64 alphanumeric
characters, including the umlaut symbol. If other
characters are used for RT data, they are displayed with
under-bars.
CT (Clock Time) mode:
The current time is displayed and updated every minute.
If the data are accidentally cut off, CT WAIT may
appear.
EON (Enhanced Other Networks):
Refer to following page.
Changing the RDS mode
The four modes are available in this unit for displaying
RDS data. When an RDS station is being received, PS,
PTY, RT and/or CT mode indicators that correspond to
the RDS data services offered by the station light up on
the front panel display. Press RDS MODE/FREQ
repeatedly to change the display mode among the RDS
data offered by the transmitting station in the order shown
below.
Notes
When an RDS station is being received, do not press RDS
MODE/FREQ until one or more RDS mode indicators light up
on the front panel display. If you press the button before the
indicators light up on the front panel display, the mode cannot
be changed. This is because this unit has not yet received all of
the RDS data on the station.
RDS data not offered by the station cannot be selected.
The RDS data service cannot be utilized by this unit if the
received signal is not strong enough. In particular, the RT mode
requires a large amount of data to be received, so it is possible
that the RT mode may not be displayed even if other RDS
modes (PS, PTY, etc.) are displayed.
RDS data cannot sometimes be received under poor reception
conditions. If so, press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO
indicator goes off from the front panel display. Although the
reception mode is changed to monaural by this operation, when
you change the display to RDS mode, RDS data may be
displayed.
If the signal strength is weakened by external interference
during the reception of an RDS station, the RDS data service
may be cut off suddenly and ...WAIT will appear on the front
panel display.
PS mode
RDS mode
OFF
CT mode
RT mode
PTY mode
NEWS
AFFAIRS
INFO
SPORT
EDUCATE
DRAMA
CULTURE
SCIENCE
VARIED
POP M
ROCK M
M.O.R. M
LIGHT M
CLASSICS
OTHER M
News
Current affairs
General information
Sports
Education
Drama
Culture
Science
Light entertainment
Pops
Rock
Middle-of-the-road music
(easy-listening)
Light classics
Serious classics
Other music
RDS MODE/FREQ
EON
RECEIVING RDS STATIONS
RDS (Radio Data System) is a data transmission system by FM stations in many countries.
RDS data contains various information such as PS (Program Service name), PTY (Program Type), RT (Radio Text), CT
(Clock Time), EON (Enhanced Other Networks), etc. The RDS function is carried out among the network stations.
0107V530_34-41_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:45 PM38
39
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
RECEIVING RDS STATIONS
PTY SEEK function
If you select the desired program type, this unit
automatically searches all preset RDS stations that are
broadcasting a program of the required type.
1 Press PTY SEEK MODE to set this unit in the
PTY SEEK mode.
The program type of the station being received or
NEWS flashes on the front panel display.
2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select the
desired program type.
The selected program type appears on the front panel
display.
3 Press PTY SEEK START to begin searching
all preset RDS stations.
The selected program type flashes and the PTY
HOLD indicator lights up on the front panel display
while searching for stations.
If a station that is broadcasting a program of the
required type is found, this unit stops at that
station.
If the called station is not the desired one, press
PTY SEEK START again. This unit begins
searching for another station that is broadcasting a
program of the same type.
To cancel this function
Press PTY SEEK MODE twice.
PTY SEEK
MODE
START
EON function
This function uses the EON data service on the RDS
station network. If you simply select the desired program
type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or SPORT), this unit
automatically searches for all preset RDS stations that are
scheduled to broadcast a program of the required type and
switches from the station being currently received to the
new station when the broadcasts starts.
Note
This function can only be used when an RDS station that offers
the EON data service is being received. When such a station is
being received, the EON indicator lights up on the front
panel display.
1 Make sure that the EON indicator lights up
on the front panel display.
If the EON indicator does not light up, tune in to
another RDS station so that the EON indicator
lights up.
2 Press EON repeatedly to select the desired
program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or
SPORT).
The selected program type name appears on the front
panel display.
If a preset RDS station of the selected program
type starts broadcasting, this unit will
automatically switch from the program being
currently received to that program. (EON indicator
flashes.)
When broadcasting of the required program ends,
the previously received station (or another
program on the same station) is recalled.
To cancel this function
Press EON repeatedly until no program type name lights
up on the front panel display.
PTY SEEK
MODE
START
RDS MODE/FREQ
EON
Flashes
Lights up
PRESET
/
TUNING
PTY HOLD
0107V530_34-41_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:45 PM39
40
Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the
standby mode after the amount of time you have set. The
sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while
this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer
also automatically turns off the external component(s)
connected to AC OUTLET(S).
The sleep timer can only be set with the remote control.
y
By connecting a commercially available timer to this unit, you
can also set a wake-up timer. Refer to the operation instructions
of the timer.
Setting the sleep timer
1 Select a source and start playback on the
source component.
2 Press SLEEP repeatedly
to set the amount of time.
Each time you press SLEEP,
the front panel display changes
as shown below.
3 The SLEEP indicator lights up on the front
panel display soon after the sleep timer has
been set.
The display then returns to the previous indication.
SLEEP
SLEEP
1
2
POWER
SLEEP
CODE SET
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
TV INPUTTV MUTE
VOLUME
MUTE
AMP
POWER POWER
AVTV
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
+
+
+
TV CHTV VOL
B
SLEEP 12Omin
LR
DSP
PCM
SLEEP
VOLUME
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER CD
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
CONCERT HALL
LR
DSP
PCM
SLEEP
VOLUME
VCR
V-AUX
DVD
TUNER CD
D
-
TV/CBL
MD/CD
-
R
SLEEP TIMER
Canceling the sleep timer
1 Press SLEEP repeatedly until SLEEP OFF
appears on the front panel display.
After a few seconds, SLEEP OFF disappears, the
SLEEP indicator goes off and the display returns
to the previous indication.
y
The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by setting this unit
in the standby mode by using STANDBY on the remote control
(or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) or by disconnecting the
AC power cord from the AC outlet.
0107V530_34-41_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:45 PM40
41
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
INPUT
POWER
SLEEP
CODE SET
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
TV INPUTTV MUTE
VOLUME
MUTE
AMP
POWER POWER
AVTV
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
+
+
+
TV CHTV VOL
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
B
2
SLEEP
6CH INPUT
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
AMP
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
B
Front panel Remote control
or
RECORDING
Notes
Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.
When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record
between the components connected to this unit.
The setting of BASS, TREBLE, VOLUME, 5 L/R
BALANCE on the SET MENU and DSP programs does not
effect the recorded material.
A source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks on this unit
cannot be recorded.
A given input source is not output to the same OUT (REC)
channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR IN is not
output to VCR OUT.)
Check the copyright laws in your country to record from
records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material
may infringe copyright laws.
If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the
picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.
Special considerations when
recording DTS software
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to
digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise
being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to
record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them,
the following considerations and adjustments need to be
made.
For LDs, DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your
player is compatible with the DTS format, follow its
operation instruction to make a setting so that the analog
signal will be output from the player.
Timer playback/recording
This unit can perform playback or recording with an
external timer (not supplied). Refer to the operating
instructions for the component and the timer to be used.
Notes
Stored data, such as input source, will be reflected when
playback or recording with the timer.
If you do not want any sound output when recording with a
timer, turn the volume down.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
(input source, volume level, set menu settings and so
on) from being lost even if this unit is disconnected
from the AC outlet. However, if the timer is turned off
for more than one week, the stored data will be lost.
21
NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER
SILENT
PHONES
STEREO
EFFECT
PROGRAM
PRESET
/
TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
BASS
+ +
TREBLE
INPUT
INPUT M0DE
6CH INPUT
VOLUME
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING MODE
STANDBY
/
ON
Recording adjustments and other operations are
performed from the recording components. Refer to the
operation instructions for these components.
1 Turn on the power of this unit and all
connected component.
2 Select the source component you want to
record from.
3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station)
on the source component.
4 Start recording on the recording component.
0107V530_34-41_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:45 PM41
42
SELECT
PRESET/CH
+
Adjusting the items on the SET
MENU
Adjustment should be made with the remote control.
Note
Some items require extra steps.
1 Press AMP.
2 Press SET MENU to enter
the SET MENU.
3 Press u/d repeatedly to
select the item you want
to adjust (1 to 10).
y
By pressing SET MENU repeatedly, you can select items in the
same order as when pressing d.
4 Press j / i once to enter
the setup mode of the
selected item.
The last setting you adjusted
appears on the front panel
display.
Depending on the item, press
u/d to select a sub item.
SET MENU
ADVANCED OPERATION
2
1
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
SELECT
PRESET/CH
TV INPUTTV MUTE
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOLUME
LEVEL
MENU
TEST
STEREO
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
TITLE
MUTE
AMP
VCR
A
+
+
+
+
TV CHTV VOL
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
B
6
3,6
4,5
The SET MENU consists of 10 items including the
speaker mode setting. Choose the appropriate item and
adjust or select the values as necessary.
y
You can adjust the items on the SET MENU while playing a
source.
Items Initial settings
1 SPEAKER SET
A CENTER LRG (large)
B MAIN LARGE
C REAR LR LRG (large)
D BASS BOTH
E MAIN Lv Nrm (Normal)
2 LFE LEVEL SP/HP 0 dB
3 SP DLY TIME 0 ms
4 D. RANGE SP/HP MAX
5 L/R BALANCE 0 dB for L/R
6
HP TONE CTRL BASS/TRBL
0 dB
7 I/O ASSIGN
A (component video input) [A] DVD
[B] D-TV/CBL
B (optical output) (1) MD/CD-R
C (optical input) (2) MD/CD-R
(3) DVD
(4) D-TV/CBL
D (coaxial input) (5) CD
8 INPUT MODE AUTO
9 DISPLAY SET
DIMMER 0
10 MEM. GUARD OFF
In the descriptions for each item from the following page, the
default setting is indicated in bold.
SET MENU
A/B/C/D/E
MENU
SELECT
PRESET/CH
+
SELECT
PRESET/CH
+
AMP
0108V530_42-47_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:45 PM42
43
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SET MENU
5 Press j / i repeatedly to
change the setting of the
item.
6 Press u/d repeatedly until the menu
disappears or simply press one of the DSP
program group buttons to exit SET MENU.
SELECT
PRESET/CH
+
SELECT
PRESET/CH
+
STEREO
EFFECT
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode
settings)
Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your
speaker configuration.
Notes
When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit,
some items are not affected.
When 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source, level
adjustments in items 1A through 1D are not affected.
1A CENTER (center speaker
mode)
By adding a center speaker to your speaker configuration,
this unit can provide better dialog localization for several
listeners and superior synchronization of sound and
images.
Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none)
LRG
Select this if you have a large center speaker. The entire
range of the center channel signal is directed to the center
speaker.
SML
Select this if you have a small center speaker. The low-
frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center
channel are directed to the speakers selected with 1D
BASS.
NON
Select this if you do not have a center speaker. All of the
center channel signal are directed to the main left and
right speakers.
or
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby
mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected
from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for
more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so,
adjust the items again.
0108V530_42-47_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:45 PM43
44
SET MENU
1B MAIN (main speaker mode)
Choices: LARGE, SMALL
LARGE
Select this if you have large main speakers. The entire
range of the main left and right channel signal is directed
to the main left and right speakers.
SMALL
Select this if you have small main speakers. The low-
frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel
are directed to the speakers selected with 1D BASS.
1C REAR LR (rear speaker mode)
Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none)
LRG
Select this if you have large rear left and right speakers or
if a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The
entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the
rear left and right speakers.
SML
Select this if you have small rear left and right speakers.
The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear
channel are directed to the speakers selected with 1D
BASS.
NON
Select this if you do not have rear speakers.
y
This unit is set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode when you
select NON for 1C REAR LR.
1D BASS (LFE/bass out mode)
LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit
decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency
signals are defined as 90 Hz and below. The Low-
frequency signals can be directed to both main left and
right speakers, and the subwoofer (subwoofer can be used
for both stereo reproduction and the DSP program).
Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH
SWFR
Select this if you use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are
directed to the subwoofer.
MAIN
Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The LFE
signals are directed to the main speakers.
BOTH
The LFE signals are directed to the subwoofer. Low-
frequency signals designated to the main channels in
accordance with other speaker mode settings are directed
to both main speakers and a subwoofer.
Note
When you select MAIN for 1D BASS, the low-frequency
signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to
the main speakers even if you select SMALL for the main
speaker mode.
1E MAIN Lv (main level mode)
Change this setting if you cannot match the output level
of the center, and rear (L/R) speakers with the main
speakers because of unusually high-efficiency
performance from the main speakers.
Choices: Nrm (Normal), 10 dB
Nrm
Select this if you can match the output level of your effect
speakers with that of your main speakers when using the
test tone.
10 dB
Select this if you cannot match the output level of your
effect speakers with that of your main speakers when
using the test tone.
0108V530_42-47_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:45 PM44
45
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SET MENU
2 LFE LEVEL
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE
(low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a
Dolby Digital or DTS signal. The LFE signal carries the
low-frequency special effect sound which is only added to
certain scenes.
Control range:
SPEAKER ............ 20 to 0 dB
HEADPHONE ..... 20 to 0 dB
Initial setting: 0 dB
1 Press d/u to select the item to be adjusted.
2 Press j to adjust the LFE level.
Note
Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your
subwoofer or headphones.
L
C
C
R
RL
RR
3 SP DLY TIME (speaker delay
time)
Use this feature to adjust the delay of the center channel
sounds. This feature works when there is sound output
from the center speaker, with a source like Dolby Digital
or DTS, etc. Ideally, the center speaker should be the
same distance from the main listening position as the left
and right speakers. However, in most home situations, the
center speaker is placed in line with the main speakers.
By delaying the sound from the center speaker, the
apparent distance from the center speaker to the main
listening position can be adjusted to make it seem the
same as the distance between the main left and right
speaker to the listening position. Adjusting the delay time
for the center speaker is especially important for giving
depth to the dialogue.
Control range:
CENTER .......................... 0 to 5 ms
Initial setting:
CENTER .......................... 0 ms
1 Press j / i to increase or decrease the delay
of the center channel sounds.
Center speaker image
y
Increasing the delay by 1 ms simulates moving the speakers
about 30 cm (one foot) farther away from the listening
position.
0108V530_42-47_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:45 PM45
46
SET MENU
7 I/O ASSIGN (input/output
assignment)
It is possible to assign jacks according to the component
to be used if this units COMPONENT VIDEO input jack
or DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jack settings (component
names for jacks) differ from that component. This makes
it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively
connect more components.
Once you assign, you can select that component with
INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons on the
remote control).
7A CMPNT-V INPUT for
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT jacks
Choices: [A] DVD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL
[B] DVD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL
7B OPTICAL OUT for OPTICAL
OUTPUT jack
Choices: (1) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR,
D-TV/CBL, DVD
7C OPTICAL IN for OPTICAL
INPUT jacks
Choices: (2) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR,
D-TV/CBL, DVD
(3) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR,
D-TV/CBL, DVD
(4) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR,
D-TV/CBL, DVD
7D COAXIAL IN for COAXIAL
INPUT jack
Choices: (5) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR,
D-TV/CBL, DVD
Notes
You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of
jack.
When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and
OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the
COAXIAL jack.
4 D. RANGE (dynamic range)
Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range. This setting
is effective only when this unit is decoding Dolby Digital
signals.
Choices: MAX, STD (standard), MIN (minimum)
MAX
Select the MAX for feature films.
STD
Select the STD for general use.
MIN
Select the MIN for listening to sources at low volume
levels.
5 L/R BALANCE (balance of the
main left and right speakers)
Use this feature to adjust the balance of the output level
from the main left and right speakers.
Control range: 20 steps for L/R
Initial setting: 0 dB for L/R
1 Press i to decrease the output level for the
main left speaker. Press j for the main right
speaker.
6 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone
control)
Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble
when you use your headphones.
Control range (dB):
BASS ............... 6 to +3
TRBL (treble) .. 6 to +3
Initial setting:
BASS ............... 0 dB
TRBL............... 0 dB
0108V530_42-47_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:45 PM46
47
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
SET MENU
8 INPUT MODE (initial input
mode)
Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources
connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn
on this unit (see page 25 for details about the input
mode).
Choices: AUTO, LAST
AUTO
Select this to allow this unit to automatically detect the
type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode.
LAST
Select this to set this unit to automatically select the last
input mode used for the respective source.
9 DISPLAY SET
DIMMER
You can adjust the brightness of the front panel display.
Control range: 4 to 0
Initial setting: 0
10 MEM. GUARD (memory guard)
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to settings
on this unit.
Choices: ON, OFF
Select ON to protect the following features:
All SET MENU items
Center, rear speakers, and subwoofer levels
DSP program parameters
Notes
When this item is set to ON, you cannot use the test tone.
When this item is set to ON, you cannot select any other SET
MENU items.
0108V530_42-47_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:45 PM47
48
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can operate other A/V components made by YAMAHA and other
manufacturers. To control other components, you must set up the remote control with the manufacturer codes.
Control area
Controlling this unit
The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit
when the AMP mode is selected. Press AMP to select the
AMP mode.
Controlling other component
The shaded areas below can be used to control other
components. Each button has a different function
depending on the selected components. Select the
component to be controlled by pressing an input selector
button.
POWER
SLEEP
CODE SET
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
SELECT
PRESET/CH
TV INPUTTV MUTE
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
VOLUME
LEVEL
MENU
TEST
STEREO
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
TITLE
MUTE
AMP
POWER POWER
AVTV
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
+
+
+
+
TV CHTV VOL
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
B
Å/ı buttons and input selector
buttons switch the control area
for each component.
* Å/ı buttons are to operate
the other components that are
not connected to this unit.
Factory setting:
Å...VCR
ı...TV
Component control area
You can control up to 9 different components. You can set up
manufacturer code and program other remote control functions for
each component (see page 50).
Å/ı buttons
and input
selector buttons
The buttons in the
dotted lines
(SYSTEM
POWER,
STANDBY,
SLEEP, 6CH
INPUT, VOLUME
+/ and MUTE)
function in any
mode.
POWER
SLEEP
CODE SET
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
VOLUME
MUTE
AMP
POWER POWER
AVTV
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
+
B
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
SELECT
PRESET/CH
TV INPUTTV MUTE
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
LEVEL
MENU
TEST
STEREO
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
TITLE
+
+
+
TV CHTV VOL
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
Press AMP to
control this unit.
0109V530_48-53_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:45 PM48
49
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Setting the manufacturer code
You can control other components by setting a
manufacturer code. Codes can be set for each of the 9
component controls.
The following table shows factory-set component
(Library: component category) and the manufacturer code
for each component control.
1 Press an input selector button or Å/ı to
select the component you want to set up.
2 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice.
3 Press the numeric buttons to enter the four
digit manufacturers code for the component
to be used.
Refer to LIST OF MANUFACTURERS CODES
at the end of this manual.
The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice.
Notes
If the manufacturer of your component has more than one
code, try each of them until you find the correct one.
If you wait for more than 30 seconds during step 3, the setup
process is canceled. If this happens, start over from step 2.
SLEEP
6CH INPUT
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
AMP
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
B
CODE SET
Component
control
(buttons)
CD
MD/CD-R
TUNER
DVD
D-TV/CBL
V-AUX
VCR
A
B
Component category
(Library)
CD
MD
TUNER
DVD
Manufacturer
YAMAHA
YAMAHA
YAMAHA
YAMAHA
TRANSMIT
STEREO
EFFECT
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
Code
0005
0024
0003
0098
Clearing setup manufacturer
codes
Clearing setup manufacturer
code for the component control
1 Press an input selector button or Å/ı to
select the component control for which you
want to clear the manufacturer code.
2 Press CODE SET by using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice.
Note
If you do not press any button within 30 seconds after step 2,
the clearing process is canceled. If this happens, start over from
step 1.
3 Enter the code number 0000.
The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice, and the
manufacturer code for the selected component is
cleared.
y
You can clear all setup manufacturer codes at once by entering
the code number 9990.
POWER
SLEEP
STANDBY
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
AMP
POWER POWER
AVTV
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
B
CODE SET
TRANSMIT
0109V530_48-53_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:46 PM49
50
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Controlling other components
DVD player VCR TV, digital/cable TV CD player CD/MD recorder Tuner
1 AV POWER *
1
Power *
1
Power *
3
VCR power *
1
Power *
1
Power *
1
Power
2 TV POWER *
2
TV power *
2
TV power *
2
TV power *
2
TV power *
2
TV power *
2
TV power
3 TV CH + *
2
TV channel up *
2
TV channel up TV channel up *
2
TV channel up *
2
TV channel up *
2
TV channel up
TV CH *
2
TV channel down
*
2
TV channel down TV channel down
*
2
TV channel down
*
2
TV channel down
*
2
TV channel down
4 TV VOL + *
2
TV volume up *
2
TV volume up TV volume up *
2
TV volume up *
2
TV volume up *
2
TV volume up
TV VOL *
2
TV volume down
*
2
TV volume down TV volume down
*
2
TV volume down
*
2
TV volume down
*
2
TV volume down
5 TV MUTE *
2
TV mute *
2
TV mute TV mute *
2
TV mute *
2
TV mute *
2
TV mute
6 TV INPUT *
2
TV input *
2
TV input TV input *
2
TV input *
2
TV input *
2
TV input
7 1-9, 0, +10
Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Preset stations (1-8)
8 TITLE Title
9 PRESET/CH u Up VCR channel up Preset up
PRESET/CH d Down
VCR channel down
Preset down
PRESET/CH j Left
PRESET/CH i Right
SELECT Select
0 RETURN Return
q
REC/DISC SKIP
Disc skip Rec *
3
VCR rec Disc skip Rec (MD)
w Play Play *
3
VCR play Play Play
e
Search backward Search backward
*
3
VCR search backward
Search backward Search backward
r Search forward Search forward *
3
VCR search forward
Search forward Search forward
AUDIO Audio
d Pause Pause *
3
VCR pause Pause Pause
t Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward
y Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward
a Stop Stop *
3
VCR stop Stop Stop
w ENTER Title/Index Enter Enter Index Index
e MENU Menu A/B/C/D/E
r DISPLAY Display Display Display
You can operate other components when you have set the
manufacturer code for your component. Note, however,
that some buttons may not operate your component.
Once you select an input source, the remote control
switches to the mode for operating the component.
POWER
SLEEP
CODE SET
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
TV INPUTTV MUTE
VOLUME
MUTE
AMP
POWER POWER
AVTV
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
+
+
+
TV CHTV VOL
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
B
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
SELECT
PRESET/CH
TV INPUTTV MUTE
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
LEVEL
MENU
TEST
STEREO
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
TITLE
MUTE
+
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
7
0
q
w
e
r
*
1
This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has POWER button.
*
2
These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/CBL or ı. When the
manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/CBL and ı areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/CBL area.
*
3
These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR if the manufacturer code is set in VCR.
0109V530_48-53_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:46 PM50
51
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
You can adjust the output level of each effect speaker
(center, rear left and right, and subwoofer) while listening
to a source.
Adjustment should be made with the remote control.
1 Press AMP.
(While playing a source)
2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the
speaker(s) you want to adjust.
Each time you press LEVEL, the selected speaker
changes and appears on the front panel display as
follows: center, rear right, rear left and subwoofer.
LEVEL
TITLE
AMP
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
SELECT
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
LEVEL
MENU
TEST
STEREO
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
TITLE
MUTE
+
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
POWER
SLEEP
CODE SET
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
TV INPUTTV MUTE
VOLUME
MUTE
AMP
POWER POWER
AVTV
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
+
+
+
TV CHTV VOL
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
B
1
2
2
3
SELECT
PRESET/CH
+
SELECT
PRESET/CH
+
LEVEL
TITLE
ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS
y
Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker(s) to
be adjusted by pressing d / u.
Center speaker output level
Subwoofer output level
Rear left speaker output
level
Rear right speaker output
level
3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level.
The control range for the center or rear left and
right speakers is from +10 dB to 10 dB.
The control range for the subwoofer is from 0 dB
to 20 dB.
Notes
When the speaker output modes for 1A CENTER and 1C
REAR LR are set to NON, and 1D BASS to MAIN, the
output level of those speakers cannot be adjusted because there
is no sound coming from these speakers.
When you adjust the output level with LEVEL, the settings you
made with the test tone will be changed.
We recommend adjusting the speakers by following the steps
described in Using the test tone on pages 21 and 22.
For 5ch Stereo
You can adjust the volume level for each channel in 5-
channel stereo mode.
Control range: 0 to 100%
CT level (Center level)
RL level (Rear left level)
RR level (Rear right level)
1 Select 5ch Stereo.
2 Press u / d repeatedly to select the
speaker(s) you want to adjust.
3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby
mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected
from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for
more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so,
set the output level again.
0109V530_48-53_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:46 PM51
52
You can adjust the time difference between the beginning
of the sound from the main speakers and the beginning of
the sound effect from the rear speakers. The larger the
value, the later the sound effect is generated. The delay
time can be individually adjusted to all DSP programs.
The following table shows factory-set delay time.
AMP
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
SELECT
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
LEVEL
MENU
TEST
STEREO
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
TITLE
MUTE
+
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
POWER
SLEEP
CODE SET
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
TV INPUTTV MUTE
VOLUME
MUTE
AMP
POWER POWER
AVTV
VCR
A
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
+
+
+
TV CHTV VOL
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
B
1
2
3
4
SELECT
PRESET/CH
+
ADJUSTING THE DELAY TIME
Adjustment should be made with the remote control.
1 Press AMP.
(While playing a source)
2 Select a DSP program you want to adjust the
delay time.
3 Press u / d so that DELAY appears on the
front panel display.
4 Press j / i to adjust the delay time.
Notes
Adding too much delay will cause an unnatural effect with
some sources.
The sound is momentarily interrupted while adjusting the delay
time.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby
mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected
from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for
more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so,
adjust the delay time again.
Program
Preset value (ms)
1. CONCERT HALL 45
2. JAZZ CLUB 30
3. ROCK CONCERT 15
4. DISCO 26
GAME 36
CONCERT VIDEO 21
5. TV SPORTS 10
6. MONO MOVIE 69
7. 70 mm SPECTACLE 23
DGTL SPECTACLE 15
DTS SPECTACLE 15
Spectacle 6.1 15
70 mm SCI-FI 20
Sci-Fi 6.1 15
DGTL SCI-FI 15
DTS SCI-FI 15
8. 70 mm ADVENTURE 20
DGTL ADVENTURE 15
DTS ADVENTURE 15
Adventure 6.1 15
70 mm GENERAL 20
DGTL GENERAL 15
DTS GENERAL 15
General 6.1 15
9. PRO LOGIC/NORMAL 15
DOLBY DIGITAL/NORMAL 5
DTS DIGITAL SUR./NORMAL 5
Matrix 6.1 5
PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED 20
DOLBY DIGITAL/ENHANCED 5
DTS DIGITAL SUR./ENHANCED 5
Enhanced 6.1 5
PRO LOGIC Movie 15
PRO LOGIC Music 5
DELAY
0109V530_48-53_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:46 PM52
53
English
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERA-
TION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
Changing parameter settings
You can adjust the values of PRO LOGIC Music
parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in
your listening room.
Adjustments should be made with the remote control.
1 Press AMP.
2 Select PRO LOGIC Music.
3 Press u / d to select the
parameter.
4 Press j / i to change the
parameter value.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 above as necessary to
change other parameters.
SELECT
PRESET/CH
+
SELECT
PRESET/CH
+
SELECT
/DTS
SUR.
90
REC
DISC SKIP
SET MENU
SELECT
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
AUDIO
LEVEL
MENU
TEST
STEREO
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
TITLE
MUTE
+
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
TV
SPORTS
MONO
MOVIE
SELECT
MATRIX 6.1
MOVIE
THEATER 1
MOVIE
THEATER 2
/DTS
SUR.
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
3421
5
90
ENTER
+10
67 8
POWER
SLEEP
CODE SET
STANDBY
TRANSMIT
6CH INPUT
SYSTEM
V
-
AUX
D
-
TV/CBL
TV INPUTTV MUTE
VOLUME
MUTE
AMP
POWER POWER
AVTV
VCR
B
DVD
MD/CD-R TUNERCD
+
+
+
TV CHTV VOL
HALL
ENTER-
TAINMENT
ROCK
CONCERT
JAZZ CLUB
A
1
2
3
4
Note
You cannot change parameter values when 10 MEM.
GUARD on the SET MENU is set to ON.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby
mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC
outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to
power failure. However, if the power is cut for more
than one week, the parameter value you edited will
return to the factory setting. If so, edit the parameter
value again.
PRO LOGIC Music parameter
descriptions
PANORAMA
Function: Turning the function on extends the front
stereo image to include the surround
speakers for wraparound effect.
Choices: OFF/ON, initial setting is OFF.
DIMENSION
Function: Gradually adjusts the soundfield either
towards the front or towards the rear.
Control range: 3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the
front), initial setting is STD (standard).
CT WIDTH (Center width)
Function: Adjusts the center image from all three
front speakers to varying degrees. The
larger the value, adjusts the center image
towards the main left and right speakers.
Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only
from center speaker) to 7 (center channel
sound is output only from main left and
right speakers), initial setting is 3.
ADJUSTING THE PARAMETER SETTINGS FOR PRO LOGIC MUSIC
AMP
0109V530_48-53_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:46 PM53
54
TROUBLESHOOTING
Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed
below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and
contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.
General
Problem
This unit fails to turn
on when STANDBY/
ON (or SYSTEM
POWER) is pressed,
or enters in the
standby mode soon
after the power has
been turned on.
No sound.
The picture does not
appear.
Cause
The power cord is not connected or the
plug is not completely inserted.
The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch
on the rear panel is not fully set to either
the left or right position.
The protection circuitry has been
activated.
This unit has been exposed to a strong
external electric shock (such as lightning
and strong static electricity).
Incorrect input or output cable
connections.
An appropriate input source has not been
selected.
The speaker connections are not secure.
The volume is turned down.
The sound is muted.
Digital signals which this unit cannot
reproduce are being input to this unit by
playing a CD-ROM, etc.
The output and input for the picture are
connected to different types of video
jacks.
Remedy
Firmly connect the power cord.
Set the switch fully to the left or right position when
this unit is in the standby mode.
Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit
and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for
each connection does not touch anything other than
its respective connection.
Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the
power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then
start operating.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
Select an appropriate input source with INPUT
l / h
or 6CH INPUT (or the input selector buttons).
Secure the connections.
Turn up the volume.
Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to
cancel a mute and adjust the volume.
Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce.
Make connections using the same type of video
jacks (S VIDEO, VIDEO (composite), or
COMPONENT VIDEO) for both the input and
output.
Refer
to page
12
10, 11
10 16
23
10, 11
24
14, 15
0110V530_54-61_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:46 PM54
55
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem
The sound suddenly
goes off.
Only the speaker on
one side can be
heard.
No sound from the
effect speakers.
No sound from the
center speaker.
No sound from the
rear speakers.
No sound from the
subwoofer.
Poor bass
reproduction.
Cause
The protection circuit has been activated
because of a short circuit, etc.
The sleep timer has functioned.
The sound is muted.
Incorrect cable connections.
Incorrect setting of 5 L/R BALANCE
on the SET MENU.
The sound effect is off.
A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or
DTS decoding DSP program is being
used with material not encoded with
Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS.
A 96-kHz sampling digital signal is
being input to this unit.
The output level of the center speaker is
set to minimum.
1A CENTER on the SET MENU is set
to NON.
One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 4)
has been selected (except for 5ch Stereo).
The source encoded with a Dolby Digital
or DTS signal does not have a center
channel signal.
The output level of the rear speakers is
set to minimum.
A monaural source is being played with
program 9.
1D BASS on the SET MENU is set to
MAIN when a Dolby Digital or DTS
signal is being played.
1D BASS on the SET MENU is set to
SWFR or MAIN when a 2-channel
source is being played.
The source does not contain low bass
signals (90 Hz and below).
1D BASS on the SET MENU is set to
SWFR or BOTH and your system does
not include a subwoofer.
The speaker mode settings (main, center,
or rear) on the SET MENU does not
match your speaker configuration.
Remedy
Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch is set
to the appropriate position and then turn this unit
back on.
Check the speaker wires are not touching each other
and then turn this unit back on.
Turn on the power, and play the source again.
Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to
cancel a mute and adjust the volume.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
Adjust it to the appropriate position.
Press STEREO/EFFECT to turn it on.
Select another DSP program.
Raise the level of the center speaker.
Select the appropriate mode for your center speaker.
Select another DSP program.
Raise the output level of the rear speakers.
Select another DSP program.
Select SWFR or BOTH.
Select BOTH.
Select MAIN.
Select the appropriate position for each speaker
based on the size of the speakers in your
configuration.
Refer
to page
12
10, 11
46
28
26 33
51
43
26 33
51
26 33
44
44
44
43, 44
0110V530_54-61_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:46 PM55
56
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem
A humming sound
can be heard.
The volume level
cannot be increased, or
the sound is distorted.
The sound effect
cannot be recorded.
A source cannot be
recorded by a digital
recording component
connected to the
DIGITAL OUTPUT jack
of this unit.
The sound field
parameters and some
other settings on this
unit cannot be
changed.
This unit does not
operate properly.
CHECK SP WIRES
appears on the front
panel display.
There is noise
interference from digital
or high-frequency
equipment, or this unit.
This unit suddenly
turns into the standby
mode.
Cause
Incorrect cable connections.
The component connected to the OUT
(REC) jacks of this unit is turned off.
It is not possible to record the sound
effect by a recording component.
A source component is not connected to
the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit.
10 MEM. GUARD in the SET MENU
is set to ON.
The internal microcomputer has been
frozen by an external electric shock (such
as lightning or excessive static electricity)
or by a power supply with low voltage.
Speaker cables are short circuited.
This unit is too close to the digital or
high-frequency equipment.
The internal temperature becomes too
high and the overheat protection circuitry
has been activated.
Remedy
Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
Turn on the power to the component.
Connect the source component to the DIGITAL
INPUT jacks of this unit.
Set 10 MEM. GUARD in the SET MENU to
OFF.
Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet
and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
Make sure all speaker cables are connected
correctly.
Move this unit further away from such
equipment.
Wait until this unit cools down and then turn it
back on.
Refer
to page
10 16
0110V530_54-61_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:46 PM56
57
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
TROUBLESHOOTING
Tuner
FM stereo reception is
noisy.
There is distortion, and
clear reception cannot
be obtained even with a
good FM antenna.
The desired station
cannot be tuned in with
the automatic tuning
method.
Previously preset
stations can no longer
be tuned in.
The desired station
cannot be tuned in with
the automatic tuning
method.
There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.
There are buzzing and
whining noises
(especially in the
evening).
Problem
FM
AM
Cause
The characteristics of FM stereo
broadcasts may cause this problem
when the transmitter is too far away or
the antenna input is poor.
There is multipath interference.
The station is too weak.
This unit has been disconnected for a
long period.
The signal is weak or the antenna
connections are loose.
Noises result from lightning,
fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats
and other electrical equipment.
A TV set is being used nearby.
Remedy
Check the antenna connections.
Try using a high-quality directional FM
antenna.
Use the manual tuning method.
Adjust the antenna position to eliminate
multipath interference.
Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.
Use the manual tuning method.
Re-store the stations.
Tighten the AM loop antenna connections
and orient it for best reception.
Use the manual tuning method.
Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.
This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to
eliminate all noise.
Move this unit away from the TV.
Refer
to page
17
34
17
34
35, 36
17
34
17
Remote control
Problem
The remote control
does not work nor
function properly.
Cause
Wrong distance or angle.
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is
striking the remote control sensor of this
unit.
The batteries are weak.
The manufacture code has not correctly
set.
Even if the manufacturer code is
correctly set, there are some models that
do not respond to the remote control.
Remedy
The remote control will function within a
maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more
than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel.
Reposition this unit.
Replace all batteries with new ones.
Set the code correctly.
Try setting another code of the same
manufacturer.
Refer to
page
7
3
49
0110V530_54-61_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:46 PM57
58
GLOSSARY
Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system
to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 main
left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for
dialog (monaural), and a rear channel for special sound
effects (monaural). The rear channel reproduces sound
within a narrow frequency range.
Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes
and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as
well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit
employs a digital signal processing system that
automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to
enhance moving sound effects and directionality.
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that
gives you completely independent multi-channel audio.
With 3 front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 rear
stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio
channels. With an additional channel especially for bass
effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has
a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel).
By using 2-channel stereo for the rear speakers, more
accurate moving sound effects and surround sound
environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The
wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum
volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the
precise sound orientation generated using digital sound
processing provide listeners with previously unheard of
excitement and realism.
With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up
to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for
your enjoyment.
Matrix 6.1
The unit incorporates Matrix 6.1 decoder for Dolby
Digital and DTS multi-channel software that enables 6.1-
channel reproduction by adding the rear center channel to
existing 5.1-channel format. (The rear center channel is
created from rear left and right channels, and outputted
from virtual rear center speaker.) With this additional
channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic
moving sound especially with scenes with fly-over and
fly-around effects.
Dolby Pro Logic
Dolby Pro Logic is an improved technique used to
decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround
softwares. This new technology enables a discrete 5-
channel playback with 2 main left and right channels, 1
center channel, and 2 rear left and right channels (instead
of only 1 rear channel for conventional Pro Logic
technology). A music mode is also available for 2-channel
sources in addition to the movie mode.
DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound
track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie
theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.
has developed a home theater system so that you can
enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial
representation of DTS digital surround in your home.
This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel
sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, 2 rear
channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a
total of 5.1 channels).
LFE 0.1 channel
This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.
The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.
This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a
low frequency range compared to the full-range
reproduced by the other 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or
DTS 5.1 channel systems.
CINEMA DSP
DIGITAL
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect
is best felt in a theater having many speakers and
designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions,
such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and
so on, can differ so widely, its inevitable that there are
differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth
of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses
YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine
Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to
provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater
in the listening room of your own home.
SILENT CINEMA
YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect
DSP algorithm for headphones.
Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound
field so that accurate representations of all the sound field
programs can be enjoyed using headphones.
0110V530_54-61_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:46 PM58
59
English
INTRODUCTION PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERAIONT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
GLOSSARY
Virtual CINEMA DSP
YAMAHA has developed a virtual CINEMA DSP
algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field
surround effects even without any rear speakers by using
virtual rear speakers.
It is even possible to enjoy virtual CINEMA DSP using a
minimal 2-speaker system that does not include a center
speaker.
PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog
audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without
using any compression. This is used as a method of
recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a
technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per
very small unit of time. Standing for pulse code
modulation, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and
then modulated for recording.
Sampling frequency and number
of quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of
times the signal is sampled per second is called the
sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when
converting the sound level into a numeric value is called
the number of quantized bits.
The range of rates that can be played back is determined
based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range
representing the sound level difference is determined by
the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the
sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies
that can be played back, and the higher the number of
quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be
reproduced.
S-video signal
With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally
transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted
as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the
chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S
VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and
allows recording and playback of even more beautiful
images.
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal
is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the
P
B
/C
B
and P
R
/C
R
signals for the chrominance. Color can
be reproduced more faithfully with this system because
each of these signals is independent. The component
signal is also called the color difference signal because
the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal.
A monitor with component input jacks is required in order
to use the component signal for output.
0110V530_54-61_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:46 PM59
60
SPECIFICATIONS
AUDIO SECTION
Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................................. 75 W
[Other models] .................................................................... 65 W
1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................................. 80 W
[Other models] .................................................................... 70 W
DIN Standard Output Power
[Europe model]
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 ........................................................ 110 W
Maximum Power (EIAJ)
[China, Korea and General models]
1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 ........................................................... 95 W
Dynamic Power (IHF)
8/6/4/2
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ......................... 95/115/140/160 W
[Other models] ............................................... 90/110/130/150 W
Damping Factor
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ................................................... 80 or more
Frequency Response
CD to Main L/R ...................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, 3 dB
Total Harmonic Distortion
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 40 W, 8 , Main L/R ................................0.06%
Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
CD (250 mV, shorted) to Main L/R, Effect Off ................. 100 dB
Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Main L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less
Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
CD (5.1 k terminated) to Main L/R ........................ 60 dB/45 dB
Tone Control (Main L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut ............................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz
Phones Output ............................................................. 0.34 V/560
Input Sensitivity
CD, etc .................................................................... 150 mV/47 k
6CH INPUT ............................................................ 150 mV/47 k
Output Level
OUT (REC) ........................................................... 150 mV/1.2 k
OUTPUT SUBWOOFER .......................................... 4.0 V/1.2 k
VIDEO SECTION
Video Signal Type ...................................................... NTSC or PAL
Composite Video Signal Level ...................................... 1 Vp-p/75
S-Video Signal Level
Y ................................................................................ 1 Vp-p/75
C .......................................................................... 0.286 Vp-p/75
Component Video Signal Level
Y ................................................................................ 1 Vp-p/75
P
B
/C
B
, P
R
/C
R
............................................................. 0.7 Vp-p/75
Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................................... 50 dB
Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)
Composite, S-Video ................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, 3 dB
Component ................................................. DC to 30 MHz, 3 dB
FM SECTION
Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Other models] .............................................. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.)
Mono/Stereo ........................ 2.0 µV (17.3 dBf) /25 µV (39.2 dBf)
Selectivity (400 kHz) ............................................................... 70 dB
Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB
Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo ................................................................. 0.2%/0.3%
Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 45 dB
Frequency Response ........................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz +0.5, 2 dB
AM SECTION
Tuning Range ......................................... 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz
Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m
GENERAL
Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................... AC 120 V/60 Hz
[Australia model] ................................................. AC 240 V/50 Hz
[U.K., Europe and Singapore models] ................ AC 230 V/50 Hz
[Korea model] ..................................................... AC 220 V/60 Hz
[China and General models] ..... AC 110/120/220/240 V, 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption
[U.S.A. model] .................................................................... 210 W
[Canada model] ...................................................... 210 W/260 VA
[Other models] ..................................................................... 230 W
Standby Mode ............................................................. max. 0.9 W
AC Outlets
[U.S.A., Canada, Europe and Singapore models]
.......................................................... 2 (Total 100 W maximum)
[China and General models] .................. 2 (Total 50 W maximum)
[U.K. and Australia models] ......................... 1 (100 W maximum)
Dimension (W x H x D)
........................ 435 x 151 x 387 mm (17 x 5-15/16 x 15-1/8)
Weight ................................................................... 10.0 kg (21.3 lbs)
Accessories ............................................................... Remote control
Batteries
75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter [U.K. model]
A/V cable [U.S.A., Canada and Australia models]
AM loop antenna
Indoor FM antenna
*Specifications are subject to change without notice.
0110V530_54-61_EN(GB) 1/18/02, 6:46 PM60
LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES
LISTE DES CODES FABRICANTS
LISTE DER HERSTELLER-CODES
LISTA ÖVER TILLVERKARKODER
LISTA DEI CODICI DEL FABBRICANTE
LISTA DE CÓDIGOS DE FABRICANTES
LIJST MET FABRIKANTENCODES
TV
ADMIRAL 0411, 0451, 0911,
1021, 1081
AIKO 0891
AKAI 0061, 0101, 0231,
1191, 1351, 1591,
1641, 1791, 1891,
1981
AKURA 1331
ALBA 1241, 1331, 2361
ALBIRAL 1971
AMSTRAD 1301, 1511
ANAM 1171
ARC EN CIEL 0571
ARCAM 0571, 0761
ARISTONA 0751
ARTHUR MARTIN 0451, 1641
ASA 0411, 0451, 0521,
0781, 0871, 1021,
1081, 1421, 2051,
2091, 2151, 2551
ASTRA 1511
ATANTIC 0761
ATLANTIC 0761
ATORI 1511
AUDIOSONIC 1181, 1321, 1511
AUSIND 0491, 1411
AUTOVOX 0091, 0351, 0481,
0491, 0601, 0781,
0951, 1051, 1081,
1391, 1421
BAIRD 1101, 1351
BANG & OLUFSEN 1081
BASIC LINE 1321, 1331
BAUER 1451
BAUR 0041, 0061, 0121,
0131, 0221, 1561
BEKO 2491, 2501
BLAUPUNKT 0221, 0231, 0241,
0251, 0471, 0741,
2201, 2211, 2221,
2231, 2241, 2261,
2571, 2581
BRANDT 0571, 0651, 0731,
0901, 1821
BRIONVEGA 1021, 1051, 1081
BRITANNIA 0761
BRUNS 0821, 0991, 1021,
1081
BSR 0391, 0691, 1621,
1901, 1981
BUSH 0451, 1241, 1331,
1641, 1741, 2131,
2151
BUSH (UK) 0481, 1561, 1611
CANDLE 0791
CENTURY 1021, 1081
CGE 0491, 0811, 0981,
1401, 1531, 1611,
1621, 1981, 2201,
2251, 2271
CITIZEN 0791
CLARIVOX 0821, 0961, 1971
CLATRONIC 1181, 1331
CONCERTO 0791
CONDOR 0761
CONTEC 0151, 1171
CONTINENTAL EDISON
0571, 0651, 0901
CRAIG 1171
CROSLEY 0021, 0491, 1021,
1081, 1401, 1981,
2201, 2251, 2271
CROWN 2541
CTC CLATRONIC 0261
CXC 1171
DAEWOO 0101, 1501, 1511,
2611
DANSAI 0101
DECCA 0271, 0581, 0601,
0971, 1101, 1691
DECCA (UK) 0271, 0581, 0601,
1101, 1681
DEGRAAF 0451, 1351
DIXI 0991, 1511
DOMEOS 0101
DORIC 1031
DUAL 0091, 0601, 1611,
1641, 2101
DUAL-TEC 0601, 1511, 1621,
2111
DUMONT 0261, 0521, 0781,
1021, 1081, 1981,
2121, 2151
DYNATRON 0101
ELBE 1551, 1971, 2031
ELECTRO TECH 1511
ELEKTRONSKA 0771
ELMAN 0261, 1621
ELTA 1511
EMERSON 0921, 1021, 1081,
1121, 1171, 1261,
1301
ERRES 0101
ETRON 1981
EUROPHON 0261, 0581, 0601,
0771, 1091, 1621,
2001
FENNER 0101, 1511
FERGUSON 0281, 0371, 0551,
0651, 0781, 0861,
0881, 1131, 1181,
1361, 1461, 1971,
1991, 2281, 2311,
2341
FIDELITY 0451, 0761, 2281
FIDELITY (UK) 0561, 0591,
1931, 2281
FILMNET 1141
FINLANDIA 0451, 2321
FINLUX 0021, 0261, 0491,
0521, 0781, 0811,
0871, 1081, 1411,
1421, 1981, 2051,
2091, 2121, 2151,
2551
FIRST LINE 1981
FISHER 0021, 0091, 0141,
0511, 0601, 0801,
0821, 0981, 1021,
1081, 1981, 2091
FORGESTONE 2281
FORMENTI 0451, 0491, 0761,
1081, 1451, 1541,
1981
FORMENTI-PHOENIX
0021, 0431, 0451,
0591, 1411
FORTRESS 1081
FRONTECH 0451, 1181, 1981
FUJITSU 1261
FUNAI 0391, 0691, 1171,
1181, 1261
FUTURETECH 1171
GBC 0021, 0141, 1321,
1511, 1621, 1981
GEC 0451, 1101, 1281,
2321
GEC (UK) 0031, 0081, 0581,
0601, 1101, 1281,
1561
GELOSO 0021, 0411, 0451,
1321, 1511, 1621,
1981
GENERAL TECHNIC
2681
GENEXXA 0451, 1331
GOLDSTAR 0591, 0601, 0761,
0791, 1371, 1491,
1511, 1561, 1621,
1641
GOODMANS 0141, 1101, 1371,
1641, 2301
GORENJE 0981, 1061
GRAETZ 0451
GRANADA 0141, 0451, 0491,
0581, 0601, 1101,
1111, 1351, 1981,
2321
GRANADA (UK) 0081, 0141,
0451, 0491, 0581,
0601, 1031, 1311,
1521, 1561, 1641
GRUNDIG 0221, 0231, 0471,
0491, 0711, 0741,
1381, 2021, 2041,
2141, 2151
HANSEATIC 0021, 0121, 0141,
0431, 0591, 1561
HANTAREX 0581
HEMMERMANN 0061
HIFIVOX 0331, 0571
HINARI 0071, 0141, 0451,
1261, 1351, 1511,
1641, 1981, 2011
HITACHI 0001, 0011, 0031,
0081, 0141, 0291,
0331, 0341, 0451,
0601, 0631, 0701,
1281, 1561, 1601,
1821, 1831, 1841,
1861, 1871, 1881,
1891, 1941, 1981,
2051, 2321, 2341
HYPER 0591, 0601, 1511,
1621
IMPERIAL 0451, 0491, 0811,
0981, 1401, 1611,
1621, 2201, 2251,
2271
INGERSOL 1511
INNO HIT 0581, 0601, 0841,
1101, 1331, 1371,
1511, 2011
INNOVATION 2591, 2601, 2611,
2621, 2641, 2651,
2661, 2711, 2721,
2761, 2771, 2781
INTERFUNK 0031, 0041, 0061,
0121, 0181, 0451,
0491, 1081, 1641,
1791, 1821, 1981,
2231
IRRADIO 0491, 1321, 1331,
1371, 1411, 1511,
2011
ISUKAI 1331
ITT 0031, 0041, 0051,
0061, 0071, 0081,
0181, 0411, 0451,
0491, 1241, 1291,
1351, 1501, 1601,
1641, 1741, 1921,
1981, 2091, 2331,
2431
ITT-NOKIA 0031, 0041, 0051,
0061, 0071, 0081,
0181, 0411, 0451,
0491, 1241, 1291,
1351, 1501, 1601,
1641, 1741, 1921,
1981, 2091, 2331,
2431
JVC (VICTOR) 0071, 0721, 1441,
1581, 1591, 1741,
1791
KAISUI 0591, 1321, 1331
KAMOSONIC 0601
KARCHER 0591, 0601, 0841,
1091, 1321, 1511,
1561, 2051
KAWASHO 0761
KENDO 0261
KENNEDY 0021, 0351, 0951,
1981
KONKA 2701
KORTING 0431, 1011, 1021,
1081, 1541
I
08V530RDS_code(GB) 1/18/02, 11:05 PM1
KTV 0601, 1171
LENOIR 0601, 1511
LEYEO 1181
LIFETEC 2591, 2601, 2611,
2621, 2641, 2651,
2661, 2671, 2681,
2691, 2711, 2761,
2771, 2781
LOEWE OPTA 0121, 0131, 0581,
0611, 1081
LOGIC 1691, 2281
LOGIK 0551, 1681, 2281
LOWEWE 0831
LUMA 0351, 0451, 1901
LUXMAN 0791
LUXMAN STEREO TUNER
0791
LUXOR 0001, 0061, 0181,
0341, 0421, 0451,
0461, 0491, 0601,
0671, 1351, 1371,
1561, 1601, 1911,
1921, 1981
LYCO 1181
MAGNADYNE 0021, 0061, 0261,
0581, 0641, 0771,
1021, 1081, 1621,
1981
MAGNAFON 0261, 0491, 0581,
0591, 0641, 0761,
1091, 2001
MANESTH 0101
MARANTZ 0101
MARELLI 1081
MARK 0101
MATSUI 0061, 0451, 0601,
0691, 1101, 1151,
1241, 1271, 1301,
1511, 1561, 1681,
1691
MAXIMAL 0071, 1981
MCMICHAEL 1281
MEDION 2591, 2601, 2611,
2621, 2641, 2651,
2661, 2671, 2681,
2691, 2711, 2721,
2761, 2771, 2781
MEMOREX 1511
METZ 0231, 0741, 1001,
1041, 1081, 1481,
2071, 2081
MGA 1231
MICROMAXX 2591, 2621, 2641,
2651, 2711, 2761,
2771, 2781
MINERVA 0221, 0231, 0491,
1381, 2141, 2151
MISTRAL 2281
MITSUBISHI 0141, 0201, 0231,
0661, 1191, 1201,
1231, 1671, 1691,
1741
MIVAR 0491, 0501, 0581,
0591, 0761, 0771,
1371, 1431, 2031
MTC 0791
MULTITECH 0261, 0581, 0601,
0641, 0981, 1321,
1511
MURPHY 0451, 2091
MURPHY (UK) 0081, 1031
N.E.I. 0101, 0961
NAD 1341
NEC 0141, 1711, 1721,
1731
NECKERMANN 0451, 0601,
0981, 1081,
1561, 1931,
1981, 2211,
2231, 2241
NEDIATOR 0101
NICAMAGIC 0761
NIKKAI 1101, 1331, 1641,
1701, 2011
NOBLIKO 0261, 0491, 0591,
0641, 1381, 1411
NOGAMATIC 0571
NOKIA 0031, 0041, 0051,
0061, 0071, 0081,
0181, 0411, 0451,
0491, 1241, 1291,
1351, 1501, 1601,
1641, 1741, 1921,
1981, 2091, 2331,
2431, 2461, 2791
NORDMENDE 0031, 0291, 0331,
0451, 0531, 0541,
0571, 1051, 1131,
1591, 1791, 1811,
1821, 1891, 1941,
2631
OCEANIC 0321, 1651, 1981
OCEANIC (F) 0031, 0061, 0321,
0441, 1661
ONCEAS 0601
ONWA 1171
ORION 0061, 0391, 0691,
0851, 1211, 1241,
1251, 1301, 1481,
1511, 1681, 1691,
1981, 2371, 2421
OSAKA 2011
OSAKI 1101, 1331, 2011
OSUME 0151
OTTO VERSAND 0021, 0121,
0141, 0221, 0601,
1561, 1741, 1981
PAEL 0591, 1411
PANASONIC 0031, 0201, 0211,
0451, 0701, 1311,
1751, 1961, 2561,
2741
PANORAMIC 2351
PATHE MARCONI 0571
PATHE’ CINEMA (F) 0431, 0591,
1621, 1661, 1971
PAUSA 1511
PAUZA 1511
PERDIO 0891, 1101
PHILCO 0021, 0491, 0811,
0981, 1021, 1081,
1401, 1611, 1621,
1751, 2201, 2251,
2271, 2451, 2471
PHILIPS 0101, 0361, 0591,
0621, 0681, 0751,
0761, 1021, 1081,
1281, 2031, 2281,
2291, 2431, 2441,
2511, 2731
PHOENIX 1081
PHONOLA 0751, 1081
PIONEER 0291, 0451, 1341,
1821
PRANDONI-PRINCE
0411, 0451,
0491, 0581, 1411
PRANDONI-PROMCE 0451,
0491, 0581
PRIMA 0451
PROFEX 1981
PROTECH 0641, 1181, 1981
QUELLE 0041, 0061, 0121,
0221, 0231, 0391,
0491, 0521, 0601,
0781, 1371, 1381,
1411, 1421, 1641,
1681, 2051, 2091,
2141, 2151, 2201,
2211, 2231, 2241,
2251, 2271, 2551,
2571, 2581
REDIOMARELLI 0101, 0451,
0661, 0771, 1081
RADIONETTE 0031, 2051, 2091
RADIOLA 2291
RANK 0481, 2151
RBM 2131, 2151
RBM (UK) 0481
REDIFFUSION 0451, 0661, 1641,
1981, 2331
REDIFFUSION (UK) 0061, 0081,
1031
REX 0071, 0101, 0351,
0411, 0451, 0951,
1901, 2061, 2101,
2111
RFT 0991, 2511
ROADSTAR 1321, 1511
ROTEL 0151
SABA 0291, 0331, 0421,
0451, 0531, 0541,
0571, 0581, 0651,
0731, 0931, 1021,
1071, 1081, 1131,
1791, 1811, 1821,
1891, 1941, 2631
SACCS 1971
SAISHO 0451, 0601, 1161,
1241, 1301, 1511,
1671, 1681, 1691
SALORA 0011, 0041, 0061,
0071, 0341, 0451,
0671, 1291, 1351,
1521, 1561, 1601,
1641, 1911, 1921,
1931, 1981, 2321
SAMBERS 0261, 0491, 0581,
0641, 1091, 1371,
1411, 2001
SAMSUNG 0101, 0601, 0841,
0981, 1101, 1181,
1371, 1511, 2011
SANYO 0141, 0151, 0401,
0601, 0801, 0821,
0981, 1021, 1101,
1111, 1291, 1351,
1691, 1741, 2051,
2091, 2551
SBR 0681, 0751, 1281,
2281
SCHAUB LORENZ 0451
SCHNEIDER 0021, 0071, 0091,
0451, 0511, 0591,
0601, 0751, 1321,
1361, 1621, 1641,
2101, 2111, 2291
SCOTT 1171, 1261
SEG 0261, 0601, 0821,
0991
SEI 0641, 0691, 1081,
1301, 1481, 1981
SELECO 0071, 0101, 0351,
0411, 0451, 0951,
1901, 2061, 2101,
2111
SENTRA 1601
SHARP 0141, 0151, 0191,
1761, 1781
SIAREM 0021, 0261, 0581,
0641, 1021, 1081,
1981
SICATEL 1971
SIEMENS 0151, 0221, 0231,
0451, 0741, 2011,
2201, 2211, 2221,
2231, 2241, 2261,
2571, 2581
SILVER 1181
SINGER 0021, 0261, 1021,
1081
SINUDYNE 0021, 0061, 0101,
0261, 0391, 0641,
0691, 0851, 0941,
1021, 1081, 1241,
1301, 1321, 1481,
1631, 1981
SKANTIC 0451
SOLAVOX 0451, 1641, 2011
SONOKO 0101, 1181, 1511
SONY 0141, 0171, 1121,
1681, 1691, 2751
SOUNDESIGN 1171
SSS 1171
STERN 0071, 0101, 0351,
0411, 0451, 0951,
1901, 2061, 2101,
2111
SUNKAI 0691
SUPRA 0791
TANDBERG 0161, 0331, 0611,
1021, 1421, 1771,
1791, 2081
TANDY 0191, 0451, 1331,
1531
TASHIKO 0141
TATUNG 0271, 0581, 0601,
0971, 1101, 1681,
1691
TCM 2621, 2641, 2711,
2761, 2771, 2781
TECHNICS 1311
TECHWOOD 0791
TEKNIKA 1171, 1231, 1261
TELE 1141
TELEAVIA 0571, 0651, 0731,
1821
TELEFUNKEN 0291, 0301, 0311,
0551, 0731, 1131,
1471, 1591, 1791,
1801, 1811, 1821,
1991, 2161, 2171,
2181, 2191, 2201,
2251, 2271, 2521,
2631
TELETECH 1511
TEMPEST 2381, 2391, 2401,
2411
TENSAI 1331, 2091
TEXET 0601
THOMSON 0331, 0481, 0531,
0571, 0631, 0651,
0731, 0901, 1241,
1571, 1591, 1791,
1811, 1821, 1891,
1941, 2531
THORN 0741, 0861, 2091,
2251, 2271, 2281
II
08V530RDS_code(GB) 1/18/02, 11:05 PM2
THORN-FERGUSON 0281, 0371,
0551, 0651, 0781,
0861, 0881, 1131,
1181, 1361, 1461,
1971, 1991, 2281
TMK 0141, 0791, 1471
TOSHIBA 0141, 0381, 0481,
1221, 1271, 1701,
1741, 1851, 2151,
2801, 2811
TRANS CONTINENS
0451
TRISTAR 2281
TRIUMPH 0481, 0581, 2121
UHER 0431, 0451, 0481,
0491, 0511, 1311,
1541
ULTRAVOX 0021, 0261, 0591,
1021, 1081, 1981
UNIVERSUM 1181, 2051
UNIVOX 1971
VEGAVOX 0811
VEXA 0101, 1511
VIDEOTON 2481
VORTEC 0101, 0651
VOXSON 0411, 0451, 0491,
1021, 1081
WALTHAM 0451
WATSON 0431, 2201, 2241
WATT RADIO 0021, 0061, 0261,
0591, 0641, 0761,
1091, 1971, 1981,
2001
WEGA 0141, 1081, 1981
WEGA COLOR 1021
WELTBLICK 0101
WESTON 1621
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
0101, 0261, 0431,
0591, 0761, 1401,
1541
YOKO 0601, 1511
ZANUSSI 0071, 0101, 0351,
0411, 0451, 0951,
1901, 2061, 2101,
2111
ZOPPAS 0451
CABLE TV
CABLETIME 1446, 1456, 1476
CLYDE CABLEVISION
1426
FILMNET 1396, 1436
FRANCE TELECOM 1386
GEC 1426
JERROLD 1416
MOVIE TIME 1466
NSC 1466
PHILIPS 1386
PIONEER 0006
SAMSUNG 1496
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA
1486, 1506
STARCOM 1416
STS 1466
TANDBERG 1366
TELE 1436
TELE +1 1436
TELESERVICE 1406, 1476
TUDI 1376
UNITED CABLE 1416
ZENITH 1406
SATELLITE TUNER
AKAI 1276
ALBA 0826, 1276
AMSTRAD 0166, 0796, 1016,
1026, 1296
ANKARO 0476
AST 0406
ASTRA 0126
BARCOM 0476
BLAUPUNKT 0966
BMC SATELLITE 0106
BRITISH TELECOM 1276
BUSH 0826
BUSH (UK) 0956
CAMBRIDGE 0196, 1276
CANAL PLUS (FRANCE)
1536
CHAPARRAL 0016, 0696, 1006
COLUMBUS 0616
CONNEXIONS 0306, 0426
DISCUS ELIPSE 0856, 0866
DISKXPRESS 0426, 0476
DRAKE 1516
ECHOSTAR 0226, 0236, 0606,
0626, 0666, 0926,
0996, 1046, 1056,
1066, 1106
ELTA 1286
ELTA SAT 0146
EURODEC 1226, 1236, 1246
FERGUSON 0046, 0176, 0186,
0296, 0846, 0956,
1306
FINLUX 0976
FRACARRO 0026, 0536, 0776
FUBA 0476, 0616, 0636,
1056
GIUCAR RECORD 0206, 0336
GRUNDIG 0176, 0946, 0956,
0966
HIGH PERFORMANCE
0916
HIRSCHMANN 0756, 0966
HITACHI 0446, 0516, 0706,
0946
ICX INTERNATIONAL 0886
ITT 0066, 0126, 0176,
0446, 1156
ITT/NOKIA 0066, 0126, 0176,
0446, 1156
JEEMON 0146
JERROLD 0846, 0986
JOHANSSON 0246
JVC 1276
KATHREIN 0116, 0266, 0276,
0366
KOSMOS 0266
KYOSTAR 1036, 1086
LENG 0246
LIFESAT 1326, 1346, 1356
LUXOR 0126, 0136, 0446,
0466, 0506, 1156
MACAB 0356
MASPRO 0016, 0116, 0256,
0956
MEDION 1326, 1346
METZ 0966
MICROMAXX 1326, 1346
MITSUBISHI 0966
MORGANS 0596
MURATTO 0406
NEC 0286, 0316, 0766,
0786, 0836
NETWORK 0046
NIKKO 1136, 1146
NOKIA 0066, 0126, 0176,
0446, 1156, 1166,
1336
NORSAT 0786
OTTO VERSAND 0966
PACE 0046, 0176, 0296,
0936, 0956, 1306,
1566, 1576
PACE MSS 0946
PACE SKY DIGITAL BOX (UK)
1526
PALCOM 0616, 0686, 0706
PALSAT 0396
PALTEC 0706
PANASONIC 0806, 1306
PANSAT 1076
PHILIPS 0326, 0346, 0476,
0956, 1126, 1186,
1196, 1206, 1216,
1306, 1316
PROSAT 1176
PTT TELECOM
0306, 0896
QUELLE 0966
RADIX 1056
REDIFFUSION 0316, 0786
RFT 1186, 1196, 1206,
1216
SAGEM 1256, 1546
SAKURA 0566, 0816
SALORA 0066, 0126, 0136,
0446, 0456, 0486,
0496, 0576
SAMSUNG 0746, 0756
SAT 0406
SATCOM 0896
SATECO 0646
SECTOR 1266
SEDEA 1096
SENTRA 0416
SIEMENS 0896, 0966
SINTRACK 0906
SKYLAB 0476
SKYSCAN 0876
SONY 0736, 0946
STELLA 0306
STRONG 0156, 0396, 1036,
1086
STV 0636
TANDBERG 1116
TANDY 0916
TANTEC 0616
TATUNG 0516, 0546
TECHNISAT 0086, 0096, 0526,
0556, 1056
TELECOM 0306
TELEMAX 0586
THORN-FERGUSON 0046, 0076,
0176, 0186, 0956
TOSHIBA 0946
TPS (FRANCE) 1546
TRIAD 0406
UNIDEN 0036, 0216, 0676,
0716, 0726
US ELECTRONICS 0886
VORTEC 0756, 1036, 1076
VTECH 0436
WINERSAT 0246
WISI 0056, 0356, 0376,
0386, 0406, 0656,
1056, 1156
WOLSEY 0916
XCOM MULTIMEDIA
1556
XSAT (FRANCE) 1556
ZEHNDER 0266, 0406
ZENDER 0406
VCR
AIWA 0042, 0352, 0432
AKAI 0042, 0422, 0492,
0582, 0612, 0642,
0652, 0762, 0912
ALBA 0002, 0112, 0282,
0332, 0342, 0972
AMSTRAD 0322, 0432, 0452
ANITECH 0002
ANITSCH 1002
ASA 0012, 0052
AUDIOSONIC 0002
BAIRD 0042, 0282, 0492
BANG & OLUFSEN 0042
BAUR 0052, 0062, 0812
BLAUPUNKT 0062, 0092, 0252,
0462, 0672, 0992
BRIONVEGA 0032
BUSH 0002, 0282, 0332,
0342, 0512, 0972
BUSH (UK) 0812
CAPEHART 0112
CGE 0042, 0432, 0762
CRAIG 0072, 0482
CROWN 0112, 0282, 0622
DAEWOO 0112, 0282, 0622
DANSAI 0012
DAYTRON 0112
DECCA 0042, 0052, 0432,
0942
DECCA (UK) 0052
DEGRAAF 0052, 0132, 0432,
0532, 0602
DIXI 0442
DUAL 0042, 0632
DUMONT 0052, 0432, 0532
DYNATECH 0432
DYNATRON 0012
ELBE 0122
ELIN 0072
EMERSON 0012, 0162, 0202,
0432, 0512, 0522
ERRES 0012
FERGUSON 0042, 0712, 0722,
0852, 0902, 1012,
1022, 1082
FIDELITY 0432
FINLANDIA 0052, 0532
FINLUX 0012, 0042, 0052,
0082, 0262, 0382,
0432, 0462, 0492,
0532, 0572, 0602,
0912
FIRST LINE 0002, 0912
FISHER 0162, 0482, 0532,
0542, 0572, 0592
FORMENTI-PHOENIX
0012, 0052
FRONTECH 0112
FUNAI 0432
GBC 0002
GEC (UK) 0022, 0052
GELOSO 0002
GENERAL TECHNIC 1172
GOLDSTAR 0012, 0122, 0812,
0952
GOODMANS 0002, 0072, 0282,
0432, 0502
GOODMANS (UK) 0002
GRAETZ 0022, 0042
GRANADA 0052, 0132, 0532,
0572
III
08V530RDS_code(GB) 1/18/02, 11:05 PM3
GRANADA (UK) 0052, 0092,
0462, 0602, 0812,
0822
GRUNDIG 0052, 0062, 0092,
0232, 0252, 0262,
0752, 0802
HANSEATIC 0052, 0812
HARMAN/KARDON 0122, 0922
HCM 0002
HINARI 0002, 0202, 0412,
0442, 0522
HITACHI 0042, 0172, 0292,
0432, 0602, 0662,
0812, 1022
IMPERIAL 0072, 0432
INGERSOL 0442
INNO HIT 0002, 0052, 0072
INNOVATION 1142, 1162, 1172
INTERFUNK 0022, 0052
IRRADIO 0002, 0012
ITT 0022, 0032, 0042,
0072, 0292, 0492,
0532, 0572, 0762
ITT-NOKIA 0022, 0032, 0042,
0072, 0292, 0492,
0532, 0572, 0762
JENSEN 0042
JVC (VICTOR) 0042, 0102, 0142,
0272, 0742, 0762,
0782, 0902
KARCHER 0052, 0072, 0812
KENDO 0492
KENWOOD 0042, 0142, 0572
LIFETEC 1142, 1162, 1172
LLOYD 0432
LOEWE OPTA 0052, 0092, 0152
LOGIK 0002, 0072, 0442
LUMA 0162
LUXOR 0492, 0572, 0812
M ELECTRONIC
0432
MAGNADYNE 0052
MAGNASONIC
0572
MANESTH 0012
MARANTZ 0012, 0052, 0092,
0122, 0502
MARK 0012
MARTA 0012
MATSUI 0012, 0442, 0512,
0522, 0812, 0972
MEDION 1142, 1162, 1172
MEMOREX 0012, 0132, 0432,
0482, 0532, 0572
METZ 0062, 0092, 0932
MGA 0912
MICROMAXX 1142, 1162, 1172
MINERVA 0062, 0092, 0252
MINOLTA 0172, 0602
MITSUBISHI 0052, 0062, 0142,
0912, 0922
MTC 0072, 0432
MULTITECH 0002, 0052, 0062,
0282, 0432
MURPHY 0432
N.E.I. 0012, 0052
NATIONAL 0462
NEC 0042, 0122, 0142
NECKERMANN 0032, 0042,
0052, 0072,
0092, 0202,
0522, 0572,
0762, 0812
NIKKAI 0112
NOBLIKO 0092
NOKIA 0022, 0032, 0042,
0072, 0292, 0492,
0532, 0572, 0762,
1152
NORDMENDE 0042, 0102, 0142,
0192, 0222, 0242,
0392, 0402, 0632,
0732, 0742, 0762,
0782, 0792, 0832,
0842, 0872
OLYMPUS 0462
OPTONICA 0132, 0502
ORION 0162, 0202, 0312,
0442, 0512, 0522,
0982
OSAKA 0432
OSAKI 0002, 0012, 0432
OTTO VERSAND 0052, 0062,
0812
PANASONIC 0022, 0212, 0462,
0672, 0992, 1092,
1102, 1182
PENTAX 0172, 0602
PERDIO 0432
PHILCO 1062
PHILIPS 0052, 0082, 0092,
0152, 0182, 0362,
0372, 0382, 0472,
0502, 1072
PHONOLA 0052, 0152
PILOT 0012
PIONEER 0052, 0142, 0372,
0472
PORTLAND 0112
PROLINE 0432
PYE 0052, 0152
QUARTZ 0572
QUELLE 0012, 0032, 0042,
0052, 0062, 0072,
0092, 0202, 0462,
0522, 0942
RADIONETTE 0022
REALISTIC 0012, 0072, 0132,
0432, 0482, 0502,
0532, 0572
RET 1072
REX 0042, 0742, 0782
RICOH 0952
SABA 0042, 0142, 0192,
0222, 0242, 0392,
0632, 0732, 0742,
0762, 0772, 0782,
0792, 0872
SAISHO 0162, 0202, 0292,
0442, 0512, 0522,
0972
SALORA 0192, 0572, 0812,
0822, 0912
SAMSUNG 0052, 0072, 0622,
0652, 1192
SANSUI 0042, 0142
SANYO 0482, 0532, 0562,
0572
SBR 0052, 0152, 0182
SCHAUB LORENZ 0022, 0042
SCHNEIDER 0002, 0012, 0052,
0072, 0432
SEG 0002, 0072
SEI-SINUDYNE 0442
SELECO 0042
SENTRA 0112
SHARP 0132, 0502, 0702
SHINTOM 0002
SIEMENS 0062, 0092, 0252,
0572
SINUDYNE 0052, 0382, 0442,
0932
SONOKO 0282
SONY 0432, 0552, 0682,
0692, 0942, 0952,
0962, 1122, 1132
STS 0602
SUNKAI 0512
SUNSTAR 0432
SYLVANIA 0432, 0912
SYMPHONIC 0432, 0912
TANDBERG 0062, 0162, 0522,
0932
TASHIKO 0132, 0432
TATUNG 0042, 0052, 0432,
0922
TCM 1142, 1162, 1172
TEAC 0042, 0432
TECHNICS 0462
TEKNIKA 0012, 0432
TELEFUNKEN 0042, 0192, 0632,
0732, 0742, 0762,
0782, 0882, 0892
TEMPEST 1032, 1042, 1052
TENOSAL 0002
THOMSON 0042, 0102, 0142,
0192, 0402, 0632,
0762
THORN 0042, 0902
THORN-FERGUSON 0042, 0222,
0302, 0712,
0722, 0742,
0762, 0852,
0862, 0872,
0902
TMK 0522
TONSAI 0002
TOSHIBA 0042, 0622, 0912
TOTEVISION 0012, 0072
TRIUMPH 0922
UHER 0042, 0072
ULTRAVOX 0032
UNITECH 0072
VECTOR RESEARCH
0122
VIDEON 1162, 1172
WELTBLICK 0012
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
0032
XENON 0162
YAMAHA 0042, 1202
YOKO 0012, 0062, 0072
DVD PLAYER
AKAI 0058
DENON 0188
HITACHI 0198
JVC 0088, 0178
KENWOOD 0148
MAGNAVOX 0128
MITSUBISHI 0138
ONKYO 0068, 0128
PANASONIC 0028
PHILIPS 0098, 0128
PIONEER 0108, 0118
PROSCAN 0158
RCA 0158
SAMSUNG 0078
SHARP 0038
SONY 0018
TECHNICS 0028
THOMSON 0168
TOSHIBA 0048, 0128
YAMAHA 0008, 0028, 0098
ZENITH 0128
LD PLAYER
AIWA 0137
FUNAI 0137
HITACHI 0047
MAGNAVOX 0077
PANASONIC 0027
PIONEER 0037
RCA 0067
REALISTIC 0137
SAMSUNG 0017, 0087
SONY 0057, 0097, 0107,
0117
VICTOR 0127
YAMAHA 0007
CD PLAYER
ACCUPHASE 0315
ADC 0865
ADCOM 0785, 1015
AKAI 0115, 0125, 0725,
0735, 0745, 0935,
1155
ARCAM 1875
ARCAM-ROTEL 0165
AUDIO-TECHNICA 0835
AUDIOSONIC 0155
AIWA 1105, 1235, 1245,
1765, 1915, 1935
BSR 0875
CALIFORNIA AUDIO LAB
1075
CARRERA 0555, 0875
CARVER 0825, 1415
CYRUS-ROTEL 0205
DENON 0045, 0955, 1045,
1595, 1795, 1805
DUAL 1005
ELIN 0185
EMERSON 1015, 1285, 1675
FISHER 0105, 0595, 0605,
0825, 1165, 1175
GENEXXA 0525, 0825, 0855,
0875, 0995, 1265,
1285, 1345, 1355,
1485, 1575, 1675,
1715, 1825
GOLDSTAR 0555, 1185, 1195,
1585
GRUNDIG 0175
HARMAN KARDON 0325, 0495,
0565, 1135, 1145,
1155
HITACHI 0065, 0585, 0685,
0945, 1005, 1015,
1225, 1545
INNOVATION 1995, 2005, 2015
ITT-NOKIA 0185
JVC (VICTOR) 0385, 0395, 0455,
0575, 0585
KARCHER 0485
KENWOOD 0025, 0055, 0145,
0215, 0595, 0675,
0695, 0705, 0715,
0925, 1355, 1485,
1575, 1675, 1715,
1825
KORTING 0175
LIFETEC 2015
LIGHT CONTROL 1155, 1645,
1655, 1665
LINN 0165, 1875
LUXMAN 0265, 0275, 0795,
0805, 1295, 1305,
1555, 1925
IV
08V530RDS_code(GB) 1/18/02, 11:05 PM4
LUXOR 0185, 1895, 1905
MAGNAVOX 1865, 1875
MARANTZ 0165, 0175, 0545,
0665, 1275, 1335,
1405, 1505, 1875,
1955
MATSUSHITA 1095, 1605
MCS 0535
MEDION 0075, 1995, 2005,
2015
MEMOREX 0525, 1015, 1265,
1275, 1285, 1675
MGA 1125
MICROMAXX 2015
MISSION 0165, 1875
MITSUBISHI 1125, 1205
NAD 0135, 0255, 0285,
0295, 0305, 0345,
0755, 0765, 1315,
1325
NAKAMICHI 0635, 0645, 1565
NEC 0405, 0535, 0775,
0785
NECKERMAN 0155, 0225
NIKKO 0835, 1165
OCEANIC 0185
OKANO 0155, 0225
ONKYO 0885, 1385, 1425,
1455, 1515
PANASONIC 1055, 1075, 1615,
1625
PHILIPS 0165, 0175, 0195,
1865, 1875
PIONEER 0095, 0335, 0425,
0435, 0445, 0525,
0855, 1035, 1945
PROTON 0905, 1875
QUASAR 1075
RADIOLA 1845, 1855
RADIOTONE 0485
REALISTIC 0825, 1015, 1265,
1275, 1285, 1575
ROTEL 1875
SABA 1005
SAE 1875
SALORA 0185
SANSUI 0415, 0965, 0975,
0985, 1255, 1675,
1875
SANYO 0625, 0825, 0845,
0915
SCHNEIDER 1845, 1855
SCOTT 1285, 1675
SHARP 0025, 0035, 1025,
1115, 1275, 1635,
1785, 1815, 1825,
1835
SHERWOOD 1275, 1445
SIEMENS 1085
SIGNATURE 1155
SONY 0345, 0355, 0365,
0375, 0865, 1685,
1695, 1705, 1715,
1725, 1735, 1745
SYLVANIA 1875
TANDBERG 1885
TASHIKO 1525
TCM 1985, 2015
TEAC 0235, 0245, 1275,
1365, 1375, 1395,
1435, 1465, 1475
TECHNICS 0465, 0475, 1065,
1075, 1625
TELEFUNKEN 1005
THETA DIGITAL 1865
THOMSON 1005
TOSHIBA 0755, 0765
VECTOR RESEARCH
0555, 0865
YAMAHA 0005, 0015, 0085,
0345, 0615, 0655,
0815, 0835, 0895,
1815
CD RECORDER/CD-RW
HITACHI 0304
JVC 0334
MARANTZ 0314, 0324
PHILIPS 0274
PIONEER 0284, 0294
YAMAHA 0244
MD RECORDER
KENWOOD 0214
SHARP 0264
PIONEER 0254
SONY 0224
YAMAHA 0024, 0224, 0234
TAPE DECK
AKAI 0124
DENON 0204
GRUNDIG 0134
HARMAN 0044
JVC 0194
KENWOOD 0164
KORTING 0134
LUXMAN 0054, 0064, 0074,
0084
MARANTZ 0134, 0144
NAD 0174
ONKYO 0184
PHILIPS 0134, 0144, 0154
PIONEER 0034, 0114
SONY 0094, 0104
YAMAHA 0004, 0014
V
08V530RDS_code(GB) 1/18/02, 11:05 PM5
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
Printed in Malaysia
V874610
RX-V530RDS
GB
OWNER’S MANUAL
MODE D’EMPLOI
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
BRUKSANVISNING
MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING
RX-V530RDS
AV Receiver
Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo
0100V530(GB)-cv1/4 1/18/02, 8:44 PM1

Documenttranscriptie

GB RX-V530RDS YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA 0100V530(GB)-cv1/4 1 RX-V530RDS AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BRUKSANVISNING MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING Printed in Malaysia V874610 1/18/02, 8:44 PM CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 16 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 2 Install this unit in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place with at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 10 cm at the back of this unit — away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. 17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. 3 4 5 6 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. To prevent fire or electrical shock, do not place this unit where it may get exposed to rain, water, and/or any type of liquid. Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical storm. 14 Take care of this unit so that no foreign objects and/or liquid drops inside this unit. 15 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. ■ For U.K. customers If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions described below. Note • The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live socket outlet. ■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE: Blue: NEUTRAL Brown: LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. CAUTION 0101V530_Cau_EN(GB) 2 1/18/02, 6:39 PM INTRODUCTION CONTENTS INTRODUCTION CONTENTS ............................................................ 1 FEATURES ............................................................. 2 GETTING STARTED ............................................ 3 Checking the package contents ................................. 3 Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4 PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP ................................................. 9 Speakers .................................................................... 9 Speaker placement .................................................... 9 Connecting the speakers .......................................... 10 Before connecting components ............................... 13 Connecting video components ................................ 14 Connecting audio components ................................ 16 Connecting the antennas ......................................... 17 Connecting an external decoder .............................. 18 Connecting the power supply cords ........................ 18 Turning on the power .............................................. 19 SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS .......................... 20 ADJUSTING SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS .. 21 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ................... 48 Control area ............................................................. 48 Setting the manufacturer code ................................. 49 Clearing setup manufacturer codes ......................... 49 Controlling other components ................................. 50 ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS ....................................................... 51 ADJUSTING THE DELAY TIME ..................... 52 ADJUSTING THE PARAMETER SETTINGS FOR PRO LOGIC MUSIC ......................... 53 Changing parameter settings ................................... 53 PRO LOGIC Music parameter descriptions ....... 53 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ADVANCED OPERATION Using the test tone ................................................... 21 Adjusting the items on the SET MENU .................. 42 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) ............ 43 2 LFE LEVEL ........................................................ 45 3 SP DLY TIME (speaker delay time) ................... 45 4 D. RANGE (dynamic range) ............................... 46 5 L/R BALANCE (balance of the main left and right speakers) ..................................................... 46 6 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) ........ 46 7 I/O ASSIGN (input/output assignment) .............. 46 8 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) .................... 47 9 DISPLAY SET .................................................... 47 10MEM. GUARD (memory guard) ........................ 47 BASIC OPERATION CONNECTIONS .................................................. 13 SET MENU ........................................................... 42 PREPARATION Front panel ................................................................ 4 Remote control .......................................................... 6 Using the remote control ........................................... 7 Front panel display .................................................... 8 INTRODUCTION ADVANCED OPERATION TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................... 54 GLOSSARY .......................................................... 58 SPECIFICATIONS .............................................. 60 BASIC OPERATION BASIC PLAYBACK ............................................ 23 Input modes and indications .................................... 25 Selecting a sound field program .............................. 26 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP) ................................................................. 29 Understanding sound fields ..................................... 29 Hi-Fi DSP programs ................................................ 29 CINEMA-DSP ...................................................... 30 Sound design of CINEMA-DSP ............................. 30 CINEMA-DSP programs ........................................ 32 TUNING ................................................................ 34 Automatic and manual tuning ................................. 34 Presetting stations .................................................... 35 Tuning in to a preset station .................................... 37 Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 37 RECEIVING RDS STATIONS ........................... 38 Description of RDS data ......................................... 38 Changing the RDS mode ......................................... 38 PTY SEEK function ................................................ 39 EON function .......................................................... 39 SLEEP TIMER ..................................................... 40 Setting the sleep timer ............................................. 40 Canceling the sleep timer ........................................ 40 English RECORDING ....................................................... 41 1 0102V530_1-8_EN(GB) 1 1/18/02, 6:39 PM FEATURES Built-in 5-channel power amplifier Sophisticated AM/FM Tuner ◆ Minimum RMS output power (0.06% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8Ω) [U.S.A. and Canada models] Main: 75 W + 75 W Center: 75 W Rear: 75 W + 75 W [Other models] Main: 65 W + 65 W Center: 65 W Rear: 65 W + 65 W ◆ 40-Station random access preset tuning ◆ Automatic preset tuning ◆ Preset station shifting capability (Preset editing) Multi-mode digital sound field processing ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic decoder ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital + Matrix 6.1 decoder ◆ DTS/DTS + Matrix 6.1 decoder ◆ CINEMA DSP: Combination of YAMAHA DSP technology and Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital or DTS ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA DSP Other features ◆ 96-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ “SET MENU” for optimizing this unit for your Audio/Video system ◆ Test tone generator for easier speaker balance adjustment ◆ 6-channel external decoder input ◆ S-video signal input/output capability ◆ Component video input/output capability ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Sleep timer ◆ Remote control with preset manufacturer codes ■ About this manual • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses in this manual. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part for the reason of the improvement in operativity ability, and others. In this case, the product has priority. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. 2 0102V530_1-8_EN(GB) 2 1/18/02, 6:39 PM GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Checking the package contents Check your package to make sure it contains the following items. Batteries (4) (AAA, R03, UM-4) Remote control AM loop antenna TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM POWER STANDBY POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP + + TV CH VOLUME – – TV MUTE TV INPUT HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER /DTS SUR. 9 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model) Indoor FM antenna (U.S.A., Canada, China, Korea and General models) A/V cable (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models) (Europe, U.K., Australia and Singapore models) – MUTE PREPARATION + TV VOL EFFECT LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU MENU TITLE A/B/C/D/E SELECT + BASIC OPERATION – TEST RETURN DISPLAY REC AUDIO DISC SKIP Insert the batteries in the correct direction by aligning the + and – marks on the batteries with the polarity markings (+ and –) inside the battery compartment. 1 • Change all of the batteries if you notice a decrease in the operating range of the remote control, that the indicator does not flash, or the light becoming dim. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. Press the part and slide off the battery compartment cover. 2 Insert the four supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity markings on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Slide the cover back on so that it snaps into place. English 1 APPENDIX If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the manufacturer code that may have been cleared. 3 3 0102V530_1-8_EN(GB) 3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 2 ■ Notes on batteries ADVANCED OPERATION Installing batteries in the remote control 1/18/02, 6:39 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 VOLUME INPUT INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER RDS MODE/FREQ STANDBY /ON EON PTY SEEK MODE START BASS TREBLE SILENT STEREO PROGRAM EFFECT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO FM/AM PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT – PHONES 8 9 0 q w e r t y RDS MODE/FREQ + u – + i EON PTY SEEK MODE START op a s (U.K. and Europe model) 1 STANDBY/ON 4 INPUT MODE Turns this unit on, or set it to the standby mode. When you turn this unit on, you will hear a click and there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. Sets the priority for the types of input signals (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) to receive when one component is connected to two or more input jacks. Priority cannot be set when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source. Standby mode In this mode, this unit will consume a small amount of power in order to receive infrared-signals from the remote control. 2 Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote control. 3 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit. 5 INPUT l / h Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch. 6 VOLUME Controls the output level of all audio channels. This does not affect the OUT (REC) level. 7 6CH INPUT Selects the audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. This audio takes priority over the source selected with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). 4 0102V530_1-8_EN(GB) 4 1/18/02, 6:39 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS 8 9 STEREO/EFFECT Switches between normal stereo and DSP effect reproduction. When STEREO is selected, 2-channel signals are directed to the main left and right speakers without effect sounds and all Dolby Digital and DTS signals (except the LFE channel) are mixed down to the main left and right speakers. Selects the DSP program. q MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Stores the current station in the memory. w TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) Switches the tuning mode between automatic and manual. Switches the reception band between FM and AM. r PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h between selecting a preset station number and tuning (the colon (:) turns on or off). This button is also used to exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. o RDS MODE/FREQ (U.K. and Europe models) When an RDS station is received, press this button to change the display mode among the PS mode, PTY mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS data service) and/or frequency display mode in turn. p PTY SEEK MODE (U.K. and Europe models) Press this button to set the unit in the PTY SEEK mode. a PTY SEEK START (U.K. and Europe models) Press this button to begin searching for a station after the desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK mode. s EON (U.K. and Europe models) Press this button to select the desired program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) when you want to tune in to a radio program of that type automatically. ADVANCED OPERATION t PRESET/TUNING l / h BASIC OPERATION e FM/AM i TREBLE Adjusts the high-frequency response for the main left and right channels. Turn right to increase or turn left to decrease the highfrequency response. PREPARATION 0 PROGRAM l / h u BASS Adjusts the low-frequency response for the main left and right channels. Turn right to increase or turn left to decrease the lowfrequency response. INTRODUCTION SILENT (PHONES jack) Allows you enjoy DSP effect for private listening with headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals are output to the speakers. Selects preset station numbers 1 to 8 when the colon (:) appears in the front panel display. Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) does not appear. y A/B/C/D/E Selects preset station groups A to E. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 5 0102V530_1-8_EN(GB) 5 1/18/02, 6:39 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote control This section describes the remote control controls and their functions. Make sure that the AMP mode is selected before starting operation. See “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on pages 48 to 50. 1 2 TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM STANDBY POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT 9 3 Input selector buttons 0 Select the input source and set the remote control to operate the selected source component. w A AMP B e r + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER /DTS SUR. 9 LEVEL PRESET/CH 5 LEVEL 6 Multi control section y Used when changing the setting and to implement the settings. ENTERTAINMENT 7 TEST Outputs the test tone to adjust the speaker levels. 8 TRANSMIT indicator u Flashes while the remote control is sending signals. 9 STANDBY SET MENU MENU TITLE Select DSP programs for the AMP position. Press a button repeatedly to select a DSP program within that group. t EFFECT 5 4 DSP program Selects the effect speaker channel to be adjusted. MUTE 4 2 CODE SET Used when setting up the manufacturer code (see page 49). q VCR Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. 8 POWER 3 1 Infrared window i Sets this unit in the standby mode. A/B/C/D/E 6 – SELECT + 7 0 SYSTEM POWER Turns on the power of this unit. TEST DISPLAY RETURN q SLEEP REC AUDIO Sets the sleep timer. DISC SKIP w 6CH INPUT Selects the audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks. e AMP Sets the remote control to the AMP mode for controlling this unit. r Å/ı Sets the remote control to operate other components (not necessarily connected to this unit) without changing this unit’s input source. t VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. 6 0102V530_1-8_EN(GB) 6 1/18/02, 6:39 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS y MUTE Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. Using the remote control Switches between normal stereo and DSP effect reproduction. When STEREO is selected, 2-channel signals are directed to the main left and right speakers without effect sounds and all Dolby Digital and DTS signals (except the LFE channel) are mixed down to the main left and right speakers. VOLUME INPUT INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER STANDBY /ON BASS TREBLE SILENT STEREO EFFECT PROGRAM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO FM/AM PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT – PHONES 30° i SET MENU INTRODUCTION u STEREO/EFFECT 30° + – + Approximately 6 m (20 feet) PREPARATION Selects the SET MENU mode. ■ Handling the remote control ADVANCED OPERATION • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – high humidity or temperature such as near a heater, stove or bath; – dusty places; or – in places subject to extremely low temperatures. BASIC OPERATION The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on the main unit during operation. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 7 0102V530_1-8_EN(GB) 7 1/18/02, 6:39 PM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel display 1 2 MATRIX 3 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD MUTE VOLUME DTS DOLBY DIGITAL PRO LOGIC AUTO STEREO PS PTY RT CT MOVIE THTR 12 ENTERTAINMENT EON PTY HOLD TUNED MEMORY SLEEP VCR DIGITAL VIRTUAL SILENT PRO LOGIC / L DSP dB mS PCM 5 4 6 7 8 9 q w e r t 0 C R LFE RL RC RR y (U.K. and Europe models) 1 Processor indicators 9 Multi-information display Lights up when the t, g, VIRTUAL, PRO LOGIC / , DSP or MATRIX are activated. Shows the current DSP program name and other information when adjusting or changing settings. 2 Input source indicator 0 RDS indicator (U.K. and Europe models) Shows the current input source with a cursor. Indicates the volume level. The name(s) of the RDS data offered by the currently received RDS station light(s) up. EON indicator lights up when an RDS station that offers the EON data service is being received. PTY HOLD indicator lights up while searching for stations in the PTY SEEK mode. 5 v indicator q STEREO indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code modulation) digital audio signals. Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an FM stereo broadcast while the “AUTO” indicator is lit. 6 SILENT indicator w TUNED indicator Lights up when headphones are connected while the digital sound field processor is on. Lights up when this unit is tuned to a station. e MEMORY indicator 7 Headphones indicator Flashes to show a station can be stored. Lights up when headphones are connected. r AUTO indicator 8 DSP program indicators Shows that this unit is in the automatic tuning mode. The name of the selected DSP program lights up when the ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER 1, MOVIE THEATER 2 or V/DTS SURROUND DSP program is selected. t SLEEP indicator 3 MUTE indicator Flashes while the MUTE function is on. 4 VOLUME level indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on. y Input channel indicator Indicates the channel components of input signals being received. 8 0102V530_1-8_EN(GB) 8 1/18/02, 6:39 PM PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP Speaker placement The main speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. They will probably be the speakers from your present stereo system. The rear speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. The center speaker is for the center sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). Rear speaker (R) Subwoofer Main speaker (L) 1.8 m (6 feet) Rear speaker (L) ■ Main speakers Place the main left and right speakers an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance between each speaker and each side of the video monitor should also be the same. ■ Center speaker Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face of your video monitor. Place the speaker as close to the monitor as possible (such as directly over or under the monitor) and centrally between the main speakers. ■ Rear speakers Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, nearly 1.8 m (6 feet) above the floor. ■ Subwoofer The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the main speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION It is also possible to further expand your system with the addition of a subwoofer. The use of a subwoofer is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for reproducing the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel with high fidelity when playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals. The YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System is ideal for natural and lively bass reproduction. Main speaker (R) ADVANCED OPERATION ■ Use of a subwoofer expands your sound field Center speaker BASIC OPERATION The main speakers should be high-performance models and have enough power-handling capacity to accept the maximum output of your audio system. The other speakers do not have to be equal to the main speakers. For precise sound localization, however, it is ideal to use the models of equivalent performance with the main speakers. Refer to the following diagram when you place the speakers. PREPARATION This unit has been designed to provide the best soundfield quality with a 5-speaker system, using main left and right speakers, rear left and right speakers and a center speaker. If you use different brands of speakers (with different tonal qualities) in your system, the tone of a moving human voice and other types of sound may not shift smoothly. We recommend that you use speakers from the same manufacturer or speakers with the same tonal quality. INTRODUCTION Speakers Note CAUTION APPENDIX • If you do not use any of effect speakers (rear and/or center), change the settings of SPEAKER SET items at the SET MENU to designate the signals to other terminals you connect speakers to. Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. English 9 0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 9 1/18/02, 6:39 PM SPEAKER SETUP Connecting the speakers Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. CAUTION • Use speakers with the specified impedance shown on the rear panel of this unit. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/ or the speakers. If necessary, use the SET MENU to change the speaker mode settings according to the number and size of the speakers in your configuration after you finish connecting your speakers. ■ Speaker cables A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. 10 mm (3/8”) 1 1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from each of the speaker cables. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. 2 ■ Connecting to the SPEAKERS terminals 2 Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 3 1 1 2 Unscrew the knob. 3 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of each terminal. (U.S.A. model) y Banana plug (U.S.A., Canada, Australia, China, Korea and General models) • Banana plug connections are also possible. First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. (U.S.A. model) ■ MAIN SPEAKERS terminals A front speaker system can be connected to these terminals. ■ REAR SPEAKERS terminals A rear speaker system can be connected to these terminals. ■ CENTER SPEAKER terminals A center speaker can be connected to these terminals. 10 0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 10 1/18/02, 6:40 PM SPEAKER SETUP Main speaker Right Left 2 INTRODUCTION 1 Center speaker 3 CENTER DIGITAL INPUT 6CH INPUT AUDIO VIDEO MAIN + L R S VIDEO VIDEO CD V-AUX SURROUND – AM ANT CENTER IN PR/CR PB/CB Y DVD 75Ω UNBAL. FM ANT D-TV /CBL IN (PLAY) MD /CD-R OUT (REC) MONITOR OUT DVD R MAIN L R SUB WOOFER MD/CD-R OPTICAL S VIDEO DIGITAL OUTPUT D-TV /CBL + MD/CD-R AC OUTLETS OUT CD AUDIO VIDEO SET BEFORE POWER ON IMPEDANCE SELECTOR MONITOR OUT OUTPUT L + DVD PREPARATION COMPONENT VIDEO GND VCR – SUB WOOFER – COAXIAL OPTICAL D-TV/CBL SPEAKERS TUNER REAR (SURROUND) R MAIN CENTER REAR : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER MAIN CENTER REAR : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER 4 BASIC OPERATION 5 L 6 Right Left Rear speaker Subwoofer system ADVANCED OPERATION 3 1 4 2 5 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 6 The diagram shows the speaker layout in the listening room. ■ SUBWOOFER jack Notes 11 0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 11 1/18/02, 6:40 PM English • The cut-off frequency of the SUBWOOFER jack is 90 Hz. • If you do not use a subwoofer, designate the signals to the main left and right speakers by changing the setting of SPEAKER SET item “1D BASS” on the SET MENU to MAIN. • Use the control on the subwoofer to adjust its volume level. It is also possible to adjust the volume level by using this unit’s remote control (see “ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS” on page 51). APPENDIX When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, including the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, connect the input jack of the subwoofer system to this jack. Low bass signals distributed from the main, center and/or rear channels are directed to this jack in accordance with your SPEAKER SET selections. The LFE (low-frequency effect) signals generated when Dolby Digital or DTS is decoded are also directed to this jack in accordance with your SPEAKER SET selections. SPEAKER SETUP ■ IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch WARNING Do not change setting of the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch when the power of this unit is on, this may damage the unit. If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be fully slid to either position. If so, slide the switch all the way to either position when this unit is in the standby mode. Select the switch position (left or right) according to the impedance of the speakers in your system. Be sure to move this switch only when this unit is in the standby mode. Switch position CENTER Speaker Impedance level Main The impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. Center The impedance must be 6 Ω or higher. + SPEAKERS – Left – – + MAIN SET BEFORE POWER ON IMPEDANCE SELECTOR L + R R REAR (SURROUND) MAIN CENTER REAR : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 8ΩMIN. /SPEAKER MAIN CENTER REAR : 4ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER : 6ΩMIN. /SPEAKER Rear The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. Main The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Center The impedance must be 8 Ω or higher. L (U.S.A. model) Right Rear The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. 12 0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 12 1/18/02, 6:40 PM CONNECTIONS This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. To enjoy multi-channel sound track of DVD software, etc. with DSP effect, you need to make digital connection. All digital input jacks are acceptable for 96-kHz sampling digital signals. CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains power until all connections between the components have been completed. Note • The OPTICAL jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard. If you use a fiber optic cable that does not conform to this standard, this unit may not function properly. PREPARATION • Be sure all connections are made correctly, that is to say L (left) to L, R (right) to R, “+” to “+” and “–” to “–”. Some components require different connection methods and have different jack names. Refer to the operation instructions for each component to be connected to this unit. • When you connect other YAMAHA audio components (such as a tape deck, MD recorder and CD player or changer), connect them to the jack with the same number labels as !, #, $ etc. YAMAHA applies this labeling system to all its products. • After you have completed all connections, check them again to make sure they are correct. • The name of jack corresponds to input selector. INTRODUCTION ■ Connecting to digital jacks Before connecting components BASIC OPERATION DIGITAL INPUT jacks (pages 13-16) ADVANCED OPERATION Antenna input terminals (page 17) 6CH INPUT jacks (page 18) SPEAKERS terminals (pages 10-11) CENTER DIGITAL INPUT 6CH INPUT VIDEO AUDIO MAIN + L R S VIDEO VIDEO CD V-AUX SURROUND – IN COMPONENT VIDEO PR/CR VCR PB/CB Y – GND DVD OUT 75Ω UNBAL. MD/CD-R MONITOR OUT DVD R MAIN L R REAR (SURROUND) L L R SUB WOOFER MD/CD-R OPTICAL S VIDEO DIGITAL OUTPUT D-TV /CBL FM ANT D-TV /CBL IN (PLAY) MD /CD-R OUT (REC) + CD + DVD ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AM ANT CENTER SUB WOOFER – COAXIAL OPTICAL D-TV/CBL SPEAKERS TUNER AUDIO AC OUTLETS (page 18) SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack (page 11) Audio component jacks (page 16) APPENDIX DIGITAL OUTPUT jack (page 16) VIDEO MONITOR OUT OUTPUT Video component jacks (pages 14-15) English 13 0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 13 1/18/02, 6:40 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting video components Refer to the connection examples on the next page. ■ Types of video jacks There are three types of video jacks as follows: COMPONENT VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO 2 1 PR/CR PB/CB Y 3 1 VIDEO jack Conventional composite video signal. 2 S VIDEO jack Transmits color and luminance separately and achives high-quality color reproduction. 3 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks Transmit color difference (PB/CB, PR/CR) and luminance separately and provide the best quality picture. • Each type of video jack works independently. Signals input through the composite video, S-video and component jacks are only output through the corresponding composite video, S-video, and component jacks. • Use a commercially available cable specified for connecting each type of jacks. • The description of the component video jacks may differ depending on the component (e.g. Y, CB, CR/Y, PB, PR/Y, B-Y, R-Y etc.). When using these jacks, refer also to the operation instructions for the component being connected. ■ Connecting a video monitor Connect the video input jack on your video monitor to the MONITOR OUT VIDEO jack. Note • If you connect this unit with a source component using S-video (or Component video) jacks, you also need to connect your video monitor using S-video (or Component video) jacks. y • If your video component has an S-video output or component video output, connect the S-video signal output jack on the component to the S VIDEO jack or connect the component video signal output jacks on the component to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. • The AUDIO jacks are available for a video component which does not have optical digital output jack. However, multichannel reproduction cannot be obtained with audio signals input from AUDIO jacks. ■ Connecting another video component Connect the audio signal output jacks on your video component to the AUDIO jacks and connect the video signal output jack on the component to the VIDEO jack on this unit. ■ Connecting a VCR or DVR (digital video recorder) Connect the audio signal input jacks on your video component to the AUDIO OUT jacks and connect the video signal input jack on the video component to the VIDEO OUT jack on this unit for picture recording. Connect the audio signal output jacks on your component to the AUDIO IN jacks and connect the video signal output jack on the component to the VIDEO IN jack on this unit to play a source from your recording component. y • If your video component has an S-video input, connect the S-video signal input jack on the component to the S VIDEO OUT jack. • If your video component has an S-video output, connect the S-video signal output jack on the component to the S VIDEO IN jack. Notes • Once you have connected a recording component to this unit, keep its power turned on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit may distort the sound from other components. • S-video and component video signals pass independently through this unit’s video circuit. Make sure to connect this unit to both a source component and a recording component using the video jacks of the same system. ■ Connecting a DVD player/digital TV/cable TV Connect the optical digital audio signal output jack on your component to the DIGITAL INPUT jack and connect the video signal output jack on the component to the VIDEO jack on this unit. Then connect AUDIO jacks on your component to the AUDIO jacks on this unit. 14 0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 14 1/18/02, 6:40 PM CONNECTIONS O OPTICAL OUTPUT Another video component VCR AUDIO INPUT AUDIO OUTPUT R L L 6CH INPUT V R AUDIO VIDEO OUTPUT L V TV/digital TV/ cable TV R V VIDEO OUTPUT V PREPARATION DIGITAL INPUT AUDIO OUTPUT VIDEO VIDEO OUTPUT INPUT AUDIO OUTPUT VIDEO MAIN L R S VIDEO VIDEO CD V-AUX SURROUND COAXIAL TUNER AM ANT CENTER SUB WOOFER OPTICAL D-TV/CBL IN COMPONENT VIDEO PR/CR PB/CB BASIC OPERATION GND VCR Y DVD DVD OUT CD 75Ω UNBAL. MONITOR OUT DVD L R SUB WOOFER MD/CD-R OPTICAL S VIDEO DIGITAL OUTPUT D-TV /CBL FM ANT D-TV /CBL IN (PLAY) MD /CD-R OUT (REC) MD/CD-R AUDIO INTRODUCTION L R VIDEO MONITOR OUT OUTPUT ADVANCED OPERATION V V VIDEO OUTPUT VIDEO INPUT O OPTICAL OUTPUT DVD player ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Video monitor indicates signal direction indicates left analog cables R indicates right analog cables O indicates optical cables V indicates video cables APPENDIX L English 15 0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 15 1/18/02, 6:40 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting audio components ■ Connecting a CD player Connect the coaxial digital output jack on your CD player to the DIGITAL INPUT CD jack. y • The AUDIO jacks are available for a CD player which does not have coaxial digital output jack. ■ Connecting a CD recorder or MD recorder y • The AUDIO jacks are available for an CD recorder or MD recorder which does not have optical digital input or output jack. Notes • Once you have connected a recording component to this unit, keep its power turned on while using this unit. If the power is off, this unit may distort the sound from other components. • DIGITAL OUTPUT jack and analog OUT (REC) jacks are independent. Only digital signals are output from DIGITAL OUTPUT jack and analog signals from OUT (REC) jacks. Connect the optical digital signal input jack on your CD recorder or MD recorder to the DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/ CD-R jack for digital recording. Connect the optical digital output jack on your CD recorder or MD recorder to the DIGITAL INPUT MD/CD-R jack to play a source from your recording component. DIGITAL INPUT COAXIAL OUTPUT CD player 6CH INPUT AUDIO VIDEO MAIN L R S VIDEO VIDEO CD C V-AUX SURROUND COAXIAL OPTICAL D-TV/CBL TUNER AM ANT CENTER SUB WOOFER IN GND VCR DVD OUT CD 75Ω UNBAL. OPTICAL OUTPUT MD/CD-R O CD recorder or MD recorder DVD O OPTICAL INPUT FM ANT D-TV /CBL IN (PLAY) MD /CD-R OUT (REC) L R SUB WOOFER MD/CD-R OPTICAL S VIDEO DIGITAL OUTPUT AUDIO OUTPUT indicates signal direction C indicates coaxial cables O indicates optical cables 16 0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 16 1/18/02, 6:40 PM VIDEO MONITOR OUT CONNECTIONS Connecting the antennas ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it. 2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND terminals. 3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. AM loop antenna (included) Indoor FM antenna (included) EO VIDEO TUNER AM ANT PREPARATION 1 INTRODUCTION Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. GND DVD 75Ω UNBAL. D-TV /CBL BASIC OPERATION FM ANT MONITO OUT VIDEO R OUT FREQUENCY STEP Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model) 1 2 11 (7/16) 8 (5/16) 6 (1/14) Cut the external sleeve of the 75-ohm coaxial cable and prepare it for connection. 3 FREQUENCY STEP switch (China and General models) FM/AM Because the interstation frequency spacing differs in different areas, set the FREQUENCY STEP switch (located on the rear panel) according to the frequency spacing in your area. North, Central and South America: 100 kHz/10 kHz Other area: 50 kHz/9 kHz Before setting this switch, disconnect the AC power plug of this unit from the AC outlet. 50kHz/9kHz Lead wire 100kHz/10kHz Cut the lead wire and remove it. 5 Clamp with pliers. Insert the wire into the slot. Snap the cover into place. FREQUENCY STEP English Insert the cable wire into the slot, and clamp it with pliers. 17 0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 17 APPENDIX 4 Clamp with pliers. A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about the outdoor antennas. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Open the cover of the included 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter. Unit: mm (inch) ADVANCED OPERATION Notes • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. 1/18/02, 6:40 PM CONNECTIONS Connecting an external decoder This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (MAIN left and right, CENTER, SURROUND left and right and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from an external decoder, sound processor, or pre-amplifier. Connect the output jacks on your external decoder to the 6CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the main and surround channels. Notes Connecting the power supply cords VOLTAGE SELECTOR VOLTAGE SELECTOR AC OUTLETS SWITCHED 50W MAX. TOTAL • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot listen to DSP programs. • When you select 6CH INPUT as the input source, settings of “1 SPEAKER SET” on the SET MENU do not apply (except for “1E MAIN Lv”). (General model) ■ Connecting the AC power cord Plug in this unit to the wall outlet. ■ AC OUTLETS (SWITCHED) U.S.A., Canada, China, Europe, Singapore and General models .............................................. 2 OUTLETS U.K. and Australia model ................................ 1 OUTLET Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your components to this unit. The power to the AC OUTLETS is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). These outlets will supply power to any source component connected to this unit whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the AC OUTLETS varies depending on the area which it was purchasing. China and General models ......................................... 50 W Other models ........................................................... 100 W ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (China and General models) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/ 220/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. 18 0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 18 1/18/02, 6:40 PM CONNECTIONS Turning on the power INTRODUCTION When all connections are complete, turn on the power of this unit. 1 VOLUME INPUT INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER STANDBY /ON BASS TREBLE SILENT STEREO PROGRAM EFFECT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO FM/AM PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT – PHONES + – + PREPARATION TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM POWER POWER STANDBY POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP + + TV CH VOLUME – – TV MUTE TV INPUT BASIC OPERATION + TV VOL 1 – MUTE HALL 1 JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power of this unit. SYSTEM POWER or ADVANCED OPERATION STANDBY /ON Remote control Front panel The level of the main volume, and then the current DSP program name appear on the front panel display. 2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 19 0103V530_9-19_EN(GB) 19 1/18/02, 6:40 PM SPEAKER MODE SETTINGS This unit has 5 SPEAKER SET items on the SET MENU that you must set according to the number of speakers in your configuration and their size. The following table summarizes these SPEAKER SET items, and shows the initial settings as well as other possible settings. If the initial settings shown in the following table are not appropriate for your speaker configuration, see “1 SPEAKER SET” on pages 43-44 to change the settings. Summary of SPEAKER SET items 1A through 1E Item Description Possible settings (default setting indicated in bold) 1A CENTER Sets center speaker availability and size. LRG/SML/NON 1B MAIN Sets main speaker size. LARGE/SMALL 1C REAR LR Sets rear L/R speakers availability and size. LRG/SML/NON 1D BASS Sets the speaker(s) to be used to output low bass signals. 1E MAIN Lv Sets the main speaker level. SWFR/MAIN/BOTH Nrm (Normal)/–10 dB 20 0104V530_20-22_EN(GB) 20 1/18/02, 6:40 PM ADJUSTING SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS Note 3 Set the BASS and TREBLE controls on the front panel to the center position and adjust the volume of this unit so you can hear the test tone. The test tone is heard (in order) from the main left speaker, center speaker, main right speaker, rear right speaker, rear left speaker, and the subwoofer. The tone is produced for 2.5 seconds from each speaker. + VOLUME – or Using the test tone BASS – TREBLE + Remote control + – BASIC OPERATION Use the test tone to balance the output levels of the speakers. The adjustment of each speaker output level should be made at your listening position using the remote control. PREPARATION VOLUME • Since this unit cannot enter the test mode while headphones are connected to this unit, be sure to unplug the headphones from the PHONES jack when using the test tone. Front panel 3 LEFT RIGHT VOLUME INPUT INPUT M0DE INTRODUCTION This section explains how to adjust speaker output levels using the test tone generator. When this adjustment is complete, the output level heard at the listening position should be the same from each speaker. This is important for best performance of the digital sound field processor, and the various decoders (Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic and DTS). 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER CENTER STANDBY /ON BASS TREBLE SILENT PROGRAM EFFECT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO FM/AM PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT – + – + ADVANCED OPERATION STEREO PHONES *SUBWOOFER 3 AMP VCR A + + + TV CH VOLUME TV VOL B – TV INPUT – L SUR. * Subwoofer test tone is output after the rear left speaker (LEFT SURROUND). MUTE HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER /DTS SUR. 9 The front panel display shows which speaker is outputting the test tone. EFFECT LEVEL 4 2,5 PRESET/CH SET MENU MENU TITLE Note A/B/C/D/E – R SUR. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION – TV MUTE 1 3 SELECT + TEST • If the test tone cannot be heard, turn down the volume, set this unit to standby mode and check the speaker connections. DISPLAY RETURN 1 Press AMP. 2 Press TEST to output the test tone. APPENDIX AMP TEST RETURN English 21 0104V530_20-22_EN(GB) 21 1/18/02, 6:40 PM ADJUSTING SPEAKER OUTPUT LEVELS 4 Adjust the level of the effect speakers using j / i so that it matches the level of the main speakers. While adjusting, the test tone is heard from the selected speaker. PRESET/CH – SELECT + Note • To adjust the level of the main speakers, use VOLUME knob (or VOLUME +/– on the remote control). 5 When adjustment is complete, press TEST to stop the test tone. TEST RETURN Notes • If “1A CENTER” on the SET MENU is set to NON and the center speaker is not connected, the center channel sound is automatically output from the main left and right speakers. • If “1C REAR LR” on the SET MENU is set to NON, the output level of the rear left and right speakers cannot be adjusted in step 4. The test tone will be circulated skipping the rear right and left speakers. • If “1D BASS” on the SET MENU is set to MAIN, the test tone will be circulated skipping the subwoofer. y • It is not necessary to readjust the speaker levels once they are set (as long as you do not change the speakers). You can enjoy listening to or watching the input source at the desired volume simply by adjusting the VOLUME knob (or VOLUME +/– on the remote control). • If the output level of the effect speakers (center, rear left, and rear right) cannot be increased enough to match the level of the main speakers, set “1E MAIN Lv” on SET MENU to –10 dB (see page 44). This setting decreases the main speaker output level to about one-third of the normal level. After you have set “1E MAIN Lv” on the SET MENU to –10 dB, adjust the levels for the center and rear speakers again. 22 0104V530_20-22_EN(GB) 22 1/18/02, 6:40 PM BASIC PLAYBACK 3 5 3 VOLUME INPUT INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER STANDBY /ON BASS 3 Press INPUT l / h repeatedly (one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the input source. The selected input source name and input mode appear on the front panel display for a few seconds. CD MD/CD-R TUNER DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX TREBLE SILENT STEREO PROGRAM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING FM/AM INTRODUCTION 1 A/B/C/D/E INPUT EFFECT EDIT – PHONES + – + or 6 5 Front panel Remote control TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT 1 VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME 3 L R 5 Selected input source MUTE HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 /DTS SUR. 9 6 ENTER EFFECT 1 SYSTEM POWER STANDBY /ON or 6CH INPUT 6CH INPUT or Front panel Remote control Front panel 2 Remote control ADVANCED OPERATION Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power. To select the audio source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks (When combining with a video source) • You need to select the input to which the video source component is connected before selecting audio source. Press 6CH INPUT until “6CH INPUT” appears on the front panel display. BASIC OPERATION CD DVD 3 PREPARATION VCR Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Note • If “6CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display, no other source can be played. To select another input source, first press 6CH INPUT to turn off “6CH INPUT” from the front panel display. APPENDIX English 23 0105V530_23-28_EN(GB) 23 1/18/02, 6:41 PM BASIC PLAYBACK 4 5 Start playback or select a broadcast station on the source component. Refer to the operation instructions for the component. Adjust the volume to the desired level. The volume level is displayed digitally. Example: –70 dB Control range: VOLUME MUTE (minimum) to 0 dB (maximum) The volume level indicator also shows the current volume level as a bar graph. If desired, use BASS and TREBLE. These controls only effect the sound from the main speakers. ■ BGV (background video) function The BGV function allows you to enjoy video images from a video source together with sounds from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while having beautiful scenery from a video source on the video monitor. Select a source from the video group, then select a source from the audio group using the input selector buttons on the remote control. BGV selections cannot be made with INPUT l / h on the front panel. VOLUME CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP + or VOLUME – BASS – TREBLE + – ■ To mute the sound 1 Remote control + Front panel • You can also cancel mute by pressing VOLUME +/–, etc. • During muting, the “MUTE” indicator flashes on the front panel display. Notes Select a DSP program if desired. Use PROGRAM l / h (DSP program buttons on the remote control) to select a DSP program. See pages 29 to 33 for details about DSP programs. When using the remote control, press AMP before selecting a DSP program. PROGRAM or HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 /DTS SUR. 9 ■ When you have finished using this unit 1 Press STANDBY/ON (STANDBY on the remote control) to set this unit in the standby mode. STANDBY STANDBY /ON or Front panel ENTERTAINMENT 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER EFFECT Front panel Remote control 24 0105V530_23-28_EN(GB) MUTE y • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the lowfrequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality from the center and rear speakers may not match that of the main left and right speakers. • If you have connected a recording component to the VCR OUT, or MD/CD-R OUT jacks, and you notice distortion or low volume during playback of other components, try turning the recording component on. 6 Press MUTE on the remote control. To resume the audio output, press MUTE again. 24 1/18/02, 6:41 PM Remote control BASIC PLAYBACK ■ Notes on 96-kHz sampling digital signals Input modes and indications Each time you turn on the power of this unit, the input mode is set according to “8 INPUT MODE” setting on the SET MENU (see page 47 for details). 1 CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP INPUT MODE or Front panel V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME DVD AUTO L R Input mode AUTO: ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Notes APPENDIX • When AUTO is selected, this unit automatically determines the type of signal. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate setting. • When playing a disc encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS on some LD or DVD players, the sound output delays for a moment when playback resumes after a search because the digital signal is selected again. • When playing a LD source that has not been digitally recorded, the sound may not be output for some LD players. In this case, set the input mode to ANALOG. ADVANCED OPERATION In this mode, the input signal is selected automatically as follows: 1) Digital signal 2) Analog signal DTS: In this mode, only the digital input signal encoded with DTS is selected, even if another signal is input at the same time. ANALOG: In this mode, only the analog input signal is selected, even if a digital signal is input at the same time. • If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. • If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal and set the input mode to ANALOG, this unit may reproduce the noise of an unprocessed DTS signal. In this case, connect the source to a digital input jack and set the input mode to AUTO or DTS. • If you switch the input mode to ANALOG while playing a source encoded with a DTS signal, this unit reproduces no sound. • If you play a source encoded with a DTS signal with the input mode set to AUTO; – This unit automatically switches to the DTSdecoding mode (The “t” indicator lights up) after having detected the DTS signal. When playback of the DTS source is completed, the “t” indicator may flash. While this indicator is flashing, only DTS source can be played. If you want to play a normal PCM source soon, set the input mode back to AUTO. – When the input mode is set to AUTO and a search or skip operation is performed during playback of a DTS source, the “t” indicator may flash. If this status continues for longer than 30 seconds, this unit will automatically switch from “DTS-decoding” mode to PCM digital signal input mode. The “t” indicator will turn off. BASIC OPERATION VCR Remote control ■ Notes on playing DTS-CD/LDs PREPARATION Press INPUT MODE (the input selector button that you have pressed to select the input source on the remote control) repeatedly until the desired input mode is shown on the front panel display. The digital input jacks of this unit can handle 96-kHz sampling digital signals. Note the following when 96-kHz sampling digital signal is input to this unit: – DSP programs cannot be selected. – Sound will be output as 2-channel stereo from only the main left and right speakers. (There may be sound output from the subwoofer depending on the SPEAKER MODE settings on the SET MENU.) Therefore, the level of the effect speakers cannot be adjusted while listening to such a source. INTRODUCTION This unit comes with a variety input jacks. You can select the type of input signals you desire. English 25 0105V530_23-28_EN(GB) 25 1/18/02, 6:41 PM BASIC PLAYBACK 3 Selecting a sound field program You can enhance your listening experience by selecting a DSP program. For details about each program, see pages 29 to 33. After selecting the desired program, press the same button repeatedly to select the desired sub-program if available. Example: Pressing MOVIE THEATER 1 repeatedly switches the sub-program between “Sci-Fi” and “Spectacle”. VOLUME INPUT INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 ENTERTAINMENT STANDBY /ON 5 BASS 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 TREBLE SILENT STEREO PROGRAM EFFECT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO FM/AM PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING /DTS SUR. A/B/C/D/E EDIT – PHONES + – 9 + ENTER EFFECT PROGRAM l / h Program name TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R STANDBY POWER TUNER SLEEP VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME DIGITAL MOVIE THTR 1 DSP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT HALL JAZZ CLUB 1 DGTLzSci-Fi L C R LFE RL RR Sub-program name Notes MUTE ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER /DTS SUR. 9 • There are 9 programs with sub-programs available with this unit. However, the selection depends on the input signal format and not all sub-programs can be used with all input signal formats. • The digital sound field processor cannot be used when a source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks of this unit is selected or when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit. • The acoustics of your listening room affect the DSP program. Minimize the sound reflections in your room to maximize the effect created by the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last DSP program used with that source. • When you set this unit in the standby mode, the current source and DSP program are memorized and are automatically selected when you turn on the power again. • If a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program (No. 7–9) automatically switches to the appropriate decoding program. • When a monaural source is being played with PRO LOGIC/ Normal or PRO LOGIC/Enhanced, or PRO LOGIC Movie, no sound will be heard from the main speakers and the rear speakers. Sound can only be heard from the center speaker. (If “1A CENTER” on the SET MENU is set to NON, the center channel sound is output from the main speakers.) ENTERTAINMENT 2,3 EFFECT 1 Press AMP. 2 Press one of the DSP program buttons on the remote control to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears on the front panel display. AMP HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 /DTS SUR. 9 ENTERTAINMENT 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER EFFECT Program name VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME DIGITAL MOVIE THTR 1 DSP DGTL Spectacle Sub-program name y L C R LFE RL RR • You can also select DSP program by pressing PROGRAM l / h on the front panel. • Select a program based on your listening preference. Program names are just for reference. 26 0105V530_23-28_EN(GB) 26 1/18/02, 6:41 PM BASIC PLAYBACK ■ Selecting PRO LOGIC 4 HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 VOLUME INPUT Press SELECT repeatedly to select the decoder; PRO LOGIC or PRO LOGIC . INPUT M0DE ENTERTAINMENT 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER /DTS SUR. 9 STANDBY /ON ENTER EFFECT BASS TREBLE SILENT STEREO PROGRAM EFFECT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E 5 EDIT – PHONES + – + TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM STANDBY POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP + + + TV CH VOLUME TV VOL – TV INPUT 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 2 9 ENTERTAINMENT 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER EFFECT y JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 9 ROCK CONCERT 2 – HALL /DTS SUR. JAZZ CLUB 1 /DTS SUR. MUTE 3,4,5 HALL • You can select PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC Movie, and PRO LOGIC Music by pressing PROGRAM l / h on the front panel repeatedly. ENTER EFFECT 1 Select a 2-channel source and start playback on the source component. 2 Press AMP. 3 Press q/DTS SUR. The previously selected sub program appears on the front panel display. AMP ROCK CONCERT JAZZ CLUB ENTERTAINMENT 2 3 4 MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 9 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1 TV SPORTS /DTS SUR. ADVANCED OPERATION HALL ENTER EFFECT Remote control VCR BASIC OPERATION – TV MUTE POWER PREPARATION PROGRAM l / h After selecting on the decoder (PRO LOGIC ), select the mode appropriate for the source by pressing q/DTS SUR. The selection switches as follow; PRO LOGIC Movie ↔ PRO LOGIC Music INTRODUCTION You can enjoy the 2-channel sources decoded into five discrete channels by selecting PRO LOGIC in program No. 9. V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R PRO LOGIC TUNER CD VOLUME PRO LOGIC / PRO LOGIC L APPENDIX DSP R English 27 0105V530_23-28_EN(GB) 27 1/18/02, 6:41 PM BASIC PLAYBACK ■ Playing Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS ES software ■ SILENT CINEMA DSP Press MATRIX 6.1 to turn on the Dolby Digital + Matrix 6.1 or DTS + Matrix 6.1 decoder. MATRIX MATRIX 6.1 VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER DIGITAL MOVIE THTR 1 +10 Spectacle 6.1 DSP The MATRIX indicator lights up. The display changes AUTO → Matrix6.1 → OFF each time the MATRIX 6.1 button is pressed. AUTO: Matrix6.1: OFF: This mode automatically switches Dolby Digital + Matrix 6.1 and DTS + Matrix 6.1 depending on the signal. Virtual rear center speaker does not work for 5.1 channel sources. This setting produces 6-channel playback of the input source using the Matrix 6.1 decoder. The virtual rear center speaker can be used when playing a 5.1-channel source. Virtual rear center speaker does not work in this setting. You can enjoy a powerful sound field similar to what you could expert from actual speakers with SILENT CINEMA DSP. You can listen to SILENT CINEMA DSP by connecting your headphones to the PHONES jack while the digital sound field processor is on. Enjoy all the DSP program using the headphones. The “SILENT” indicator lights up on the front panel display. (When sound effects are off, you listen to the source with normal stereo reproduction.) Notes • This feature is not available when 6CH INPUT is selected or 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit. • The sound of LFE channel will be mixed and output from the headphone. ■ Normal Stereo Reproduction 1 Press STEREO to turn off the sound effect for normal stereo reproduction. Press STEREO again to turn the sound effect back on. STEREO STEREO or ENTER EFFECT EFFECT Front panel Remote control Notes • The setting becomes AUTO once this unit turns into standby mode. • Some Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS ES software may not contain the signal that is necessary for this unit to switch to the Matrix 6.1 decoding mode. To turn on the Matrix 6.1 decoder when playing such a source, select “Matrix6.1”. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP With Virtual CINEMA DSP, you can enjoy all DSP programs without rear speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce a natural sound field. You can listen to virtual CINEMA DSP by setting “1C REAR LR” in the SET MENU to NON. Sound field processing changes to VIRTUAL CINEMA DSP automatically. Note • This unit is not set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode even if “1C REAR LR” is set to NON in the following cases: – when the 5ch Stereo, DOLBY DIGITAL Normal, Pro Logic Normal, Pro Logic , or DTS Normal program is selected; – when the sound effect is turned off; – when 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source; – when 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit; – when using the test tone; or – when connecting the headphones. Notes • If you turn off the sound effects, no sound is output from the center speaker, rear speakers. • If you turn off the sound effects while a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being output, the dynamic range of the signal is automatically compressed and the sounds of the center and rear speaker channels are mixed and output from the main speakers. • The volume may be greatly reduced when you turn off the sound effects or if you set “4 D. RANGE” on the SET MENU to MIN. In this case turn on the sound effect. • The sound of LFE channel will be directed to the main left and right or the subwoofer (or both) channels depending on the setting of “1D BASS” on the SET MENU. y During stereo reproduction, you can display information such as the type, format and sampling frequency of the signal input from the components connected to this unit. (While playing a source) 1 2 Press AMP. Press d to display the information about the input signal. PRESET/CH – SELECT 28 0105V530_23-28_EN(GB) 28 1/18/02, 6:41 PM + DIGITAL SOUND FIELD PROCESSING (DSP) PREPARATION A sound field is defined as the “characteristic sound reflections of a particular space.” In concert halls and other music venues, we hear early reflections and reverberations as well as the direct sound produced by the artist(s). The variations in the early reflections and other reverberations among the different music venues is what gives each venue its special and recognizable sound quality. YAMAHA sent teams of sound engineers all around the world to measure the sound reflections of famous concert halls and music venues, and collect detailed sound field information such as the direction, strength, range, and delay time of those reflections. Then we stored this enormous amount of data in the ROM chips of this unit. INTRODUCTION Understanding sound fields ■ Recreating a sound field BASIC OPERATION Recreating the sound field of a concert hall or an opera house requires localizing the virtual sound sources in your listening room. The traditional stereo system that uses only two speakers is not capable of recreating a realistic sound field. YAMAHA’s DSP requires three effect speakers to recreate sound fields based on the measured sound field data. The processor controls the strength and delay time of the signals output from the three effect speakers to localize the virtual sound sources and fully encompass the listener. Hi-Fi DSP programs No. Program ADVANCED OPERATION The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. Features A large round concert hall with a rich surround effect. Pronounced reflections from all directions emphasize the extension of sounds. The sound field has a great deal of presence, and your virtual seat is near the center, close to the stage. 2 JAZZ CLUB This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club, that seats up to 300 people. Its wide left to right seating arrangement offers a real and vibrant sound. 3 ROCK CONCERT The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall. 4 ENTERTAINMENT/ Disco This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-energy, “immediate” sound. ENTERTAINMENT/ 5ch Stereo Using this program increases the listening position range. This is a sound field suitable for background music at parties, etc. APPENDIX CONCERT HALL ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1 English 29 0106V530_29-33_EN(GB) 29 1/18/02, 6:42 PM CINEMA-DSP Sound design of CINEMA-DSP Filmmakers intend for the dialog to be located right on the screen, the effect sound a little farther back, the music spread even farther back, and the surround sound around the listener. Of course, all of these sounds must be synchronized with the images on the screen. CINEMA-DSP is an upgraded version of YAMAHA DSP specially designed for movie soundtracks. CINEMA-DSP integrates the DTS, Dolby Digital, and Dolby Pro Logic surround sound technologies with YAMAHA DSP sound field programs to provide a surround sound field. It recreates comprehensive movie sound design in your audio room. In CINEMA-DSP sound field programs, YAMAHA’s exclusive DSP processing is added to the Main left and right, and Center channels, so the listener can enjoy realistic dialogue, depth of sound, smooth transition between sound sources, and a surround sound field that goes beyond the screen. When a DTS or Dolby Digital signal is detected, the CINEMA-DSP sound field processor automatically chooses the most suitable sound field program for that signal. L SURROUND SOUND FIELD PRESENCE SOUND FIELD DIALOG EFFECT MUSIC R SURROUND SOUND FIELD In addition to the DSP, this unit is equipped with a variety of precise decoders; Dolby Pro Logic decoder for Dolby Surround sources, Dolby Pro Logic decoder for Dolby Surround and 2-channel sources, Dolby Digital/DTS decoder for multi-channel sources and Dolby Digital + Matrix 6.1 or DTS + Matrix 6.1 decoder for adding a rear center channel (the rear center channel is outputted from virtual rear center speaker). You can select CINEMA-DSP programs to optimize these decoders and the DSP sound patterns depending on the input source. 30 0106V530_29-33_EN(GB) 30 1/18/02, 6:43 PM CINEMA-DSP ■ Dolby Digital/DTS + DSP sound field effect Left surround DSP sound field Right surround DSP sound field ■ Dolby Digital/DTS + Matrix 6.1 + DSP sound field effect ■ Dolby Pro Logic + DSP sound field effect Surround DSP sound field ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ Dolby Pro Logic ADVANCED OPERATION Most movie software has 4-channel (left, center, right, and surround) sound information encoded by Dolby Surround matrix processing and stored on the left and right tracks. These signals are processed by the Dolby Pro Logic decoder. The MOVIE THEATER programs are designed to recreate the spaciousness and delicate nuances of sound that tend to be lost in the encoding and decoding processes. Presence DSP sound field BASIC OPERATION These programs provide you with the maximum experience of the spacious surround effects by adding an extra rear center DSP sound field created from the virtual rear center speaker. PREPARATION These programs use YAMAHA’s tri-field DSP processing on each of the Dolby Digital or DTS signals for the front, left surround, and right surround channels. This processing enables this unit to reproduce the immense sound field and surround expression of a Dolby Digitalor DTS-equipped movie theater without sacrificing the clear separation of all channels. Presence DSP sound field INTRODUCTION The 6-channel soundtracks found on 70-mm film produce precise sound field localization and rich, deep sound without using matrix processing. This unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs provide the same quality of sound and sound localization that 6-channel soundtracks do. The built-in Dolby Digital or DTS decoder brings the professional-quality sound designed for movie theaters into your home. With this unit’s MOVIE THEATER programs, you can use Dolby Digital or DTS technology to recreate a dynamic sound that gives you the feeling of being in a public theater. Dolby Pro Logic decodes Dolby Surround software into 5 discrete full-range channels (3 channels in front and 2 channels in rear). There are 2 modes; MOVIE for movies and MUSIC for 2-channel audio sources. APPENDIX English 31 0106V530_29-33_EN(GB) 31 1/18/02, 6:43 PM CINEMA-DSP CINEMA-DSP programs ■ For movie programs: No. 7 to 9 This unit automatically chooses the appropriate decoder and DSP sound field pattern according to the input signal format. Table of Program Names for Each Input Format Input No. 2 channel 5.1 channel 6.1 channel * Stereo DOLBY DIGITAL DTS DOLBY DIGITAL Matrix 6.1 DTS Matrix 6.1 70 mm Spectacle DGTL Spectacle DTS Spectacle Spectacle 6.1 Spectacle 6.1 70 mm Sci-Fi DGTL Sci-Fi DTS Sci-Fi Sci-Fi 6.1 Sci-Fi 6.1 70 mm Adventure DGTL Adventure DTS Adventure Adventure 6.1 Adventure 6.1 70 mm General DGTL General DTS General General 6.1 General 6.1 — Normal — Matrix 6.1 — — Enhanced — Enhanced 6.1 — — — Normal — Matrix 6.1 — — Enhanced — Enhanced 6.1 Normal — — — — Enhanced — — — — Movie — — — — Music — — — — Program 7 8 9 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 DOLBY DIGITAL DTS DIGITAL SUR PRO LOGIC PRO LOGIC * means the Matrix 6.1 decoder is ON. y • If a Dolby Digital signal or DTS signal is input when the input mode is set to AUTO, the DSP program will automatically switch to the Dolby Digital playback sound field or DTS playback sound field. • If Dolby Digital Surround EX software or DTS ES software is played when AUTO is selected by pressing the MATRIX 6.1 button on the remote control, the Dolby Digital + Matrix 6.1 or DTS + Matrix 6.1 decoder usually turns on and the corresponding DSP program is selected. • MATRIX 6.1 on the remote control can be used to play Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel sources with the virtual rear center speaker. In this case the program name changes to the corresponding name for 6.1 channel. • When playing a 6.1 channel source with MATRIX 6.1 on the remote control turned off, the program name changes to the corresponding name for 5.1 channel. Notes • The “ ” indicator does not light up when selecting program No. 9 except in Enhanced mode. • When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, main and rear speakers output effect sounds. 32 0106V530_29-33_EN(GB) 32 1/18/02, 6:43 PM CINEMA-DSP The following list gives you a brief description of the sound fields produced by each of the DSP programs. Keep in mind that most of these are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments. Select the DSP program that you feel sounds best regardless of the name and description given for it below. 7 This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form of science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid the silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. General This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by a soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the echo effect of conversations without losing clarity. Enhanced Mode ■ For audio-video sources: No. 4 to 6 No. Features This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. ENTERTAINMENT/ Concert Video This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to concert video sounds. 5 TV SPORTS With this program, you can enjoy watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. In a stereo broadcast of a sports game, the commentator is oriented at the center position, and the shouts and the atmosphere in the stadium spread on the surround side, while their spread to the rear is properly restrained. 6 MONO MOVIE This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth by using only the presence sound field. APPENDIX ENTERTAINMENT/ Game ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 4 Program ADVANCED OPERATION This program ideally simulates the multi-surround speaker systems of the 35-mm film theaters. Dolby Pro Logic decoding, Dolby Digital decoding or DTS decoding and digital sound field processing create precise effects without altering the original sound orientation. The surround effects produced by this sound field wrap around the viewer naturally from the back to the left and right, and toward the screen. BASIC OPERATION 9 MOVIE THEATER 2 Spectacle PREPARATION 8 Features Program MOVIE THEATER 1 INTRODUCTION No. English 33 0106V530_29-33_EN(GB) 33 1/18/02, 6:43 PM TUNING 4 Automatic and manual tuning There are 2 ways to tune; automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin automatic tuning. Press h to tune in to a higher frequency, or press l to tune in to a lower frequency. PRESET/TUNING VCR ■ Automatic tuning V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER TUNED A AM 144O 1 When tuned in to a station, the “TUNED” indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown on the front panel display. VOLUME INPUT INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER y STANDBY /ON BASS • Use the manual tuning method if the tuning search does not stop at the desired station because the signal is weak. TREBLE SILENT STEREO EFFECT PROGRAM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO FM/AM PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT – PHONES + – + ■ Manual tuning If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, you must tune in to it manually. 3 2 3 4 1 1 Select TUNER and the reception band following steps 1 and 2 described in “Automatic tuning” at left. 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off from the front panel display. Press INPUT l / h (TUNER on the remote control) to select TUNER as the input source. SYSTEM INPUT or STANDBY POWER MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT POWER POWER TV AV CD DVD TUNING MODE Front panel AUTO VCR A B AUTO/MAN'L MONO AMP Goes off If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. Remote control 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display. PRESET/TUNING EDIT or 3 VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER TUNED FM/AM Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel display. 3 A AM 144O Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune in to the desired station manually. Hold down the button to continue the tuning search. PRESET/TUNING TUNING MODE AUTO Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO Note If the colon (:) appears on the front panel display, press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. VCR PRESET/TUNING V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R • Manually tuning in to an FM station will automatically change the reception mode to monaural to increase the signal quality. TUNER TUNED EDIT A AM 144O 34 0107V530_34-41_EN(GB) 34 1/18/02, 6:44 PM TUNING Notes Presetting stations VOLUME INPUT INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER STANDBY /ON BASS TREBLE SILENT STEREO PROGRAM EFFECT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO FM/AM PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT – PHONES + – + 1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band. FM/AM 2 TUNING MODE AUTO AUTO/MAN'L MONO 3 Lights up ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for more than 3 seconds. The preset number and the “MEMORY” and “AUTO” indicators flash. Then, after about 5 seconds, automatic preset tuning begins from the frequency currently displayed toward the higher frequencies. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If so, store the stations again. ADVANCED OPERATION Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel display. BASIC OPERATION 32 1 Automatic preset tuning options You can select the preset number from which this unit will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower frequencies. After pressing MEMORY in step 3: 1. Press A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h to select the preset number under which the first station will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when stations have all been stored up to E8. 2. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon (:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning toward lower frequencies. PREPARATION You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations. This function enables this unit to automatically tune in to FM stations with strong signals, and to store up to 40 (8 stations x 5 groups) of those stations in order. This feature enables you to easily tune in to any preset station by selecting the preset station number (see page 37). INTRODUCTION ■ Automatically presetting stations (for FM stations) • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • When a station data is stored under a preset number, the frequency and reception band are also stored. • You can manually replace a preset station with another FM or AM station by simply following the procedure in the section “Manually presetting stations” on page 36. • If the number of the received stations does not reach E8, automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after searching all stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it manually in the monaural mode, and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting stations” on page 36. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER AUTO MEMORY A1:FM APPENDIX VCR CD VOLUME L R When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. English 35 0107V530_34-41_EN(GB) 35 1/18/02, 6:44 PM TUNING ■ Manually presetting stations 4 You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups) manually. VOLUME INPUT INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. Press h to select a higher preset station number. Press l to select a lower preset station number. PRESET/TUNING STANDBY /ON BASS TREBLE SILENT STEREO PROGRAM EFFECT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO FM/AM PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT – PHONES + – + VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME TUNED MEMORY 2,5 1 4 3 C3:AM 63O kHz 5 Tune in to a station. See page 34 for tuning instructions. VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME TUNED A AM 63O kHz L R When tuned in to a station, the front panel display shows the frequency of received station. 2 L R Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the front panel while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. MEMORY The station band and frequency appear on the front MAN'L/AUTO FM panel display with the preset group and number you have selected. Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM). The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about 5 seconds. VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME TUNED C3:AM 63O kHz L R Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3. MEMORY MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM 6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations. Flashes Notes 3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. The group letter appears and make sure that the colon (:) appears on the front panel display. • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. A/B/C/D/E VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME TUNED MEMORY C :AM 63O kHz L R 36 0107V530_34-41_EN(GB) 36 1/18/02, 6:44 PM TUNING Tuning in to a preset station Exchanging preset stations You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations. The example below describes the procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”. INTRODUCTION You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the preset station number under which it was stored. VOLUME INPUT INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER VOLUME INPUT INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER STANDBY /ON STANDBY /ON BASS TREBLE SILENT STEREO PROGRAM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO FM/AM PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E BASS EFFECT EDIT TREBLE SILENT – PHONES + – + STEREO PROGRAM EFFECT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO FM/AM PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E EDIT – PHONES – + PREPARATION 2 1 + 2,4 1,3 1,3 EFFECT LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU 1 2 MENU TITLE A/B/C/D/E – + SELECT TEST DISPLAY RETURN Tune in to preset station “E1” by using the A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. See “Tuning in to a preset station” at left. 2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the front panel display. AUDIO DISC SKIP 1 Press A/B/C/D/E (A/B/C/D/E on the remote control) to select the preset station group. The preset group letter appears on the front panel display and changes each time you press A/B/C/D/E. V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD TUNED MEMORY EDIT E1:FM 87.5 MHz SET MENU A/B/C/D/E or MENU Front panel Remote control Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET u / d on the remote control) to select a preset station number (1 to 8). The preset group and number appear on the front panel display along with the station band, frequency and the “TUNED” indicator lights up. VCR SELECT MD/CD-R TUNER CD A5:FM 9O.6 MHz + Front panel DVD L R Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again. The stations stored at the two preset assignments are exchanged. VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD PRESET/TUNING MEMORY Remote control EDIT EDIT E1-A5 V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER APPENDIX Shows the exchange of stations has been completed. VCR CD TUNED E1:FM 87.5 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION – D-TV/CBL VOLUME PRESET/TUNING or V-AUX TUNED MEMORY 4 PRESET/CH Tune in to preset station “A5” by using the A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. “A5” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the front panel display. ADVANCED OPERATION 3 A/B/C/D/E 2 VCR PRESET/TUNING BASIC OPERATION 1 REC MHz English 37 0107V530_34-41_EN(GB) 37 1/18/02, 6:45 PM RECEIVING RDS STATIONS RDS (Radio Data System) is a data transmission system by FM stations in many countries. RDS data contains various information such as PS (Program Service name), PTY (Program Type), RT (Radio Text), CT (Clock Time), EON (Enhanced Other Networks), etc. The RDS function is carried out among the network stations. Description of RDS data This unit can receive, PS, PTY, RT, CT, and EON data when receiving RDS broadcasting stations. ■ PS (Program Service name) mode: The name of the RDS station being received is displayed. ■ PTY (Program Type) mode: There are 15 program types to classify RDS stations. NEWS News AFFAIRS Current affairs INFO General information SPORT Sports EDUCATE Education DRAMA Drama CULTURE Culture SCIENCE Science VARIED Light entertainment POP M Pops ROCK M Rock M.O.R. M Middle-of-the-road music (easy-listening) LIGHT M Light classics CLASSICS Serious classics OTHER M Other music ■ RT (Radio Text) mode: Information about the program (such as the title of the song, name of the singer, etc.) on the RDS station being received is displayed by a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters, including the umlaut symbol. If other characters are used for RT data, they are displayed with under-bars. ■ CT (Clock Time) mode: The current time is displayed and updated every minute. If the data are accidentally cut off, “CT WAIT” may appear. ■ EON (Enhanced Other Networks): Refer to following page. Changing the RDS mode The four modes are available in this unit for displaying RDS data. When an RDS station is being received, PS, PTY, RT and/or CT mode indicators that correspond to the RDS data services offered by the station light up on the front panel display. Press RDS MODE/FREQ repeatedly to change the display mode among the RDS data offered by the transmitting station in the order shown below. RDS MODE/FREQ EON PTY mode RT mode CT mode RDS mode OFF Notes • When an RDS station is being received, do not press RDS MODE/FREQ until one or more RDS mode indicators light up on the front panel display. If you press the button before the indicators light up on the front panel display, the mode cannot be changed. This is because this unit has not yet received all of the RDS data on the station. • RDS data not offered by the station cannot be selected. • The RDS data service cannot be utilized by this unit if the received signal is not strong enough. In particular, the RT mode requires a large amount of data to be received, so it is possible that the RT mode may not be displayed even if other RDS modes (PS, PTY, etc.) are displayed. • RDS data cannot sometimes be received under poor reception conditions. If so, press TUNING MODE so that the “AUTO” indicator goes off from the front panel display. Although the reception mode is changed to monaural by this operation, when you change the display to RDS mode, RDS data may be displayed. • If the signal strength is weakened by external interference during the reception of an RDS station, the RDS data service may be cut off suddenly and “...WAIT” will appear on the front panel display. 38 0107V530_34-41_EN(GB) 38 PS mode 1/18/02, 6:45 PM RECEIVING RDS STATIONS PTY SEEK function EON function 1 Press PTY SEEK MODE to set this unit in the PTY SEEK mode. The program type of the station being received or “NEWS” flashes on the front panel display. Note PTY SEEK MODE START Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select the desired program type. The selected program type appears on the front panel display. PRESET/TUNING Press PTY SEEK START to begin searching all preset RDS stations. The selected program type flashes and the “PTY HOLD” indicator lights up on the front panel display while searching for stations. PTY HOLD Lights up ■ To cancel this function 2 Press EON repeatedly to select the desired program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or SPORT). The selected program type name appears on the front panel display. RDS MODE/FREQ EON • If a preset RDS station of the selected program type starts broadcasting, this unit will automatically switch from the program being currently received to that program. (EON indicator flashes.) • When broadcasting of the required program ends, the previously received station (or another program on the same station) is recalled. ■ To cancel this function Press EON repeatedly until no program type name lights up on the front panel display. Press PTY SEEK MODE twice. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • If a station that is broadcasting a program of the required type is found, this unit stops at that station. • If the called station is not the desired one, press PTY SEEK START again. This unit begins searching for another station that is broadcasting a program of the same type. Make sure that the “EON” indicator lights up on the front panel display. If the “EON” indicator does not light up, tune in to another RDS station so that the “EON” indicator lights up. ADVANCED OPERATION PTY SEEK MODE START 1 BASIC OPERATION 3 • This function can only be used when an RDS station that offers the EON data service is being received. When such a station is being received, the “EON” indicator lights up on the front panel display. PREPARATION Flashes 2 This function uses the EON data service on the RDS station network. If you simply select the desired program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS or SPORT), this unit automatically searches for all preset RDS stations that are scheduled to broadcast a program of the required type and switches from the station being currently received to the new station when the broadcasts starts. INTRODUCTION If you select the desired program type, this unit automatically searches all preset RDS stations that are broadcasting a program of the required type. APPENDIX English 39 0107V530_34-41_EN(GB) 39 1/18/02, 6:45 PM SLEEP TIMER Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the standby mode after the amount of time you have set. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off the external component(s) connected to AC OUTLET(S). Canceling the sleep timer 1 The sleep timer can only be set with the remote control. y Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears on the front panel display. After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, the “SLEEP” indicator goes off and the display returns to the previous indication. SLEEP • By connecting a commercially available timer to this unit, you can also set a wake-up timer. Refer to the operation instructions of the timer. y • The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by setting this unit in the standby mode by using STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) or by disconnecting the AC power cord from the AC outlet. Setting the sleep timer TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM 1 STANDBY POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP POWER + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – TV MUTE TV INPUT 2 – MUTE 1 Select a source and start playback on the source component. 2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD SLEEP MD/CD-R TUNER CD SLEEP DSP PCM 3 SLEEP 12Omin VOLUME L R The “SLEEP” indicator lights up on the front panel display soon after the sleep timer has been set. The display then returns to the previous indication. VCR V-AUX D-TV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD SLEEP DSP PCM CONCERT HALL VOLUME L R 40 0107V530_34-41_EN(GB) 40 1/18/02, 6:45 PM RECORDING 1 2 VOLUME INPUT INPUT M0DE 6CH INPUT NATURAL SOUND AV RECEIVER STANDBY /ON STEREO PROGRAM EFFECT FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PRESET/TUNING PRESET/TUNING TREBLE A/B/C/D/E EDIT – + – + TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM 2 STANDBY POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP POWER + + TV CH VOLUME – – TV MUTE TV INPUT ■ Special considerations when recording DTS software – MUTE HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT Turn on the power of this unit and all connected component. 2 Select the source component you want to record from. CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP INPUT or Remote control 3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source component. 4 Start recording on the recording component. ■ Timer playback/recording This unit can perform playback or recording with an external timer (not supplied). Refer to the operating instructions for the component and the timer to be used. Notes • Stored data, such as input source, will be reflected when playback or recording with the timer. • If you do not want any sound output when recording with a timer, turn the volume down. APPENDIX Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data (input source, volume level, set menu settings and so on) from being lost even if this unit is disconnected from the AC outlet. However, if the timer is turned off for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Front panel For LDs, DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your player is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operation instruction to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player. ADVANCED OPERATION 1 The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. BASIC OPERATION + TV VOL If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. PREPARATION BASS SILENT PHONES Notes • Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. • When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record between the components connected to this unit. • The setting of BASS, TREBLE, VOLUME, “5 L/R BALANCE” on the SET MENU and DSP programs does not effect the recorded material. • A source connected to the 6CH INPUT jacks on this unit cannot be recorded. • A given input source is not output to the same OUT (REC) channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR IN is not output to VCR OUT.) • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. INTRODUCTION Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operation instructions for these components. English 41 0107V530_34-41_EN(GB) 41 1/18/02, 6:45 PM ADVANCED OPERATION SET MENU The SET MENU consists of 10 items including the speaker mode setting. Choose the appropriate item and adjust or select the values as necessary. Adjusting the items on the SET MENU y • You can adjust the items on the SET MENU while playing a source. Items 1 Adjustment should be made with the remote control. Initial settings SPEAKER SET A CENTER B MAIN C REAR LR D BASS E MAIN Lv AMP VCR A + + + TV CH VOLUME TV VOL B – – TV MUTE TV INPUT 1 – MUTE LRG (large) LARGE LRG (large) BOTH Nrm (Normal) HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 /DTS SUR. 9 6 ENTER EFFECT LEVEL 3,6 PRESET/CH SET MENU MENU TITLE A/B/C/D/E – 2 + SELECT TEST 2 LFE LEVEL SP/HP RETURN 0 dB 4,5 DISPLAY REC AUDIO DISC SKIP 3 SP DLY TIME 0 ms 4 D. RANGE SP/HP MAX 5 L/R BALANCE 0 dB for L/R 6 HP TONE CTRL BASS/TRBL 0 dB 7 I/O ASSIGN A (component video input) Note • Some items require extra steps. 1 Press AMP. 2 Press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU. [A] DVD [B] D-TV/CBL B (optical output) (1) MD/CD-R C (optical input) (2) MD/CD-R (3) DVD (4) D-TV/CBL AMP SET MENU MENU A/B/C/D/E 3 Press u/d repeatedly to select the item you want to adjust (1 to 10). PRESET/CH – SELECT + D (coaxial input) (5) CD 8 INPUT MODE AUTO 9 DISPLAY SET DIMMER • By pressing SET MENU repeatedly, you can select items in the same order as when pressing d. 0 4 y 10 MEM. GUARD OFF • In the descriptions for each item from the following page, the default setting is indicated in bold. Press j / i once to enter the setup mode of the selected item. The last setting you adjusted appears on the front panel display. Depending on the item, press u/d to select a sub item. 42 0108V530_42-47_EN(GB) 42 1/18/02, 6:45 PM PRESET/CH – SELECT + PRESET/CH – SELECT + SET MENU 5 Press j / i repeatedly to change the setting of the item. PRESET/CH – + SELECT 1 SPEAKER SET (speaker mode settings) 6 Press u/d repeatedly until the menu disappears or simply press one of the DSP program group buttons to exit SET MENU. PRESET/CH – SELECT + or HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 9 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER EFFECT By adding a center speaker to your speaker configuration, this unit can provide better dialog localization for several listeners and superior synchronization of sound and images. Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none) LRG Select this if you have a large center speaker. The entire range of the center channel signal is directed to the center speaker. NON Select this if you do not have a center speaker. All of the center channel signal are directed to the main left and right speakers. ADVANCED OPERATION SML Select this if you have a small center speaker. The lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the center channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1D BASS”. BASIC OPERATION Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the items again. ■ 1A CENTER (center speaker mode) PREPARATION /DTS SUR. ENTERTAINMENT Notes • When 96-kHz sampling digital signals are input to this unit, some items are not affected. • When 6CH INPUT is selected as the input source, level adjustments in items 1A through 1D are not affected. INTRODUCTION Use this feature to select suitable output modes for your speaker configuration. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 43 0108V530_42-47_EN(GB) 43 1/18/02, 6:45 PM SET MENU ■ 1B MAIN (main speaker mode) ■ 1D BASS (LFE/bass out mode) Choices: LARGE, SMALL LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Low-frequency signals are defined as 90 Hz and below. The Lowfrequency signals can be directed to both main left and right speakers, and the subwoofer (subwoofer can be used for both stereo reproduction and the DSP program). LARGE Select this if you have large main speakers. The entire range of the main left and right channel signal is directed to the main left and right speakers. SMALL Select this if you have small main speakers. The lowfrequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1D BASS”. ■ 1C REAR LR (rear speaker mode) Choices: LRG (large), SML (small), NON (none) LRG Select this if you have large rear left and right speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the rear speakers. The entire range of the rear channel signal is directed to the rear left and right speakers. SML Select this if you have small rear left and right speakers. The low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the rear channel are directed to the speakers selected with “1D BASS”. NON Select this if you do not have rear speakers. Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), MAIN, BOTH SWFR Select this if you use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the subwoofer. MAIN Select this if you do not use a subwoofer. The LFE signals are directed to the main speakers. BOTH The LFE signals are directed to the subwoofer. Lowfrequency signals designated to the main channels in accordance with other speaker mode settings are directed to both main speakers and a subwoofer. Note • When you select MAIN for “1D BASS”, the low-frequency signals (90 Hz and below) of the main channel are directed to the main speakers even if you select SMALL for the main speaker mode. ■ 1E MAIN Lv (main level mode) y • This unit is set in the virtual CINEMA DSP mode when you select NON for “1C REAR LR”. Change this setting if you cannot match the output level of the center, and rear (L/R) speakers with the main speakers because of unusually high-efficiency performance from the main speakers. Choices: Nrm (Normal), –10 dB Nrm Select this if you can match the output level of your effect speakers with that of your main speakers when using the test tone. –10 dB Select this if you cannot match the output level of your effect speakers with that of your main speakers when using the test tone. 44 0108V530_42-47_EN(GB) 44 1/18/02, 6:45 PM SET MENU 2 LFE LEVEL Control range: SPEAKER ............ –20 to 0 dB HEADPHONE ..... –20 to 0 dB Initial setting: 0 dB Press d/u to select the item to be adjusted. 2 Press j to adjust the LFE level. Note • Adjust the LFE level according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. 1 Press j / i to increase or decrease the delay of the center channel sounds. Center speaker image C R RR y • Increasing the delay by 1 ms simulates moving the speakers about 30 cm (one foot) farther away from the listening position. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION RL ADVANCED OPERATION C L BASIC OPERATION Control range: CENTER .......................... 0 to 5 ms Initial setting: CENTER .......................... 0 ms PREPARATION 1 Use this feature to adjust the delay of the center channel sounds. This feature works when there is sound output from the center speaker, with a source like Dolby Digital or DTS, etc. Ideally, the center speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position as the left and right speakers. However, in most home situations, the center speaker is placed in line with the main speakers. By delaying the sound from the center speaker, the apparent distance from the center speaker to the main listening position can be adjusted to make it seem the same as the distance between the main left and right speaker to the listening position. Adjusting the delay time for the center speaker is especially important for giving depth to the dialogue. INTRODUCTION Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel when playing back a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. The LFE signal carries the low-frequency special effect sound which is only added to certain scenes. 3 SP DLY TIME (speaker delay time) APPENDIX English 45 0108V530_42-47_EN(GB) 45 1/18/02, 6:45 PM SET MENU 4 D. RANGE (dynamic range) Use this feature to adjust the dynamic range. This setting is effective only when this unit is decoding Dolby Digital signals. Choices: MAX, STD (standard), MIN (minimum) MAX Select the “MAX” for feature films. STD Select the “STD” for general use. MIN Select the “MIN” for listening to sources at low volume levels. 7 I/O ASSIGN (input/output assignment) It is possible to assign jacks according to the component to be used if this unit’s COMPONENT VIDEO input jack or DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jack settings (component names for jacks) differ from that component. This makes it possible to change the jack assignment and effectively connect more components. Once you assign, you can select that component with INPUT l / h (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). ■ 7A CMPNT-V INPUT for COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT jacks Choices: 5 L/R BALANCE (balance of the main left and right speakers) [A] DVD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL [B] DVD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL ■ 7B OPTICAL OUT for OPTICAL OUTPUT jack Use this feature to adjust the balance of the output level from the main left and right speakers. Choices: Control range: 20 steps for L/R Initial setting: 0 dB for L/R ■ 7C OPTICAL IN for OPTICAL INPUT jacks 1 Choices: Press i to decrease the output level for the main left speaker. Press j for the main right speaker. 6 HP TONE CTRL (headphone tone control) Use this feature to adjust the level of the bass and treble when you use your headphones. Control range (dB): BASS ............... TRBL (treble) .. Initial setting: BASS ............... TRBL ............... –6 to +3 –6 to +3 0 dB 0 dB (1) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL, DVD (2) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL, DVD (3) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL, DVD (4) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL, DVD ■ 7D COAXIAL IN for COAXIAL INPUT jack Choices: (5) MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, VCR, D-TV/CBL, DVD Notes • You cannot select an item more than once for the same type of jack. • When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. 46 0108V530_42-47_EN(GB) 46 1/18/02, 6:45 PM SET MENU 8 INPUT MODE (initial input mode) INTRODUCTION Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on this unit (see page 25 for details about the input mode). Choices: AUTO, LAST PREPARATION AUTO Select this to allow this unit to automatically detect the type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode. LAST Select this to set this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for the respective source. 9 DISPLAY SET BASIC OPERATION ■ DIMMER You can adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Control range: –4 to 0 Initial setting: 0 10 MEM. GUARD (memory guard) ADVANCED OPERATION Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to settings on this unit. Choices: ON, OFF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Select ON to protect the following features: • All SET MENU items • Center, rear speakers, and subwoofer levels • DSP program parameters Notes • When this item is set to ON, you cannot use the test tone. • When this item is set to ON, you cannot select any other SET MENU items. APPENDIX English 47 0108V530_42-47_EN(GB) 47 1/18/02, 6:45 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can operate other A/V components made by YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control other components, you must set up the remote control with the manufacturer codes. Control area ■ Controlling this unit ■ Controlling other component The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit when the AMP mode is selected. Press AMP to select the AMP mode. The shaded areas below can be used to control other components. Each button has a different function depending on the selected components. Select the component to be controlled by pressing an input selector button. TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM Å/ı buttons and input selector buttons POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT POWER TRANSMIT CODE SET VCR Press AMP to control this unit. STANDBY POWER A AMP B + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 MUTE /DTS SUR. 9 The buttons in the dotted lines (SYSTEM POWER, STANDBY, SLEEP, 6CH INPUT, VOLUME +/– and MUTE) function in any mode. Å/ı buttons and input selector buttons switch the control area for each component. * Å/ı buttons are to operate the other components that are not connected to this unit. Factory setting: Å...VCR ı...TV SYSTEM STANDBY POWER MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP POWER POWER TV AV CD + VOLUME + TV VOL – +– TV CH MUTE – TV MUTE TV INPUT HALL JAZZ CLUB ENTER EFFECT LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU A/B/C/D/E – SELECT 3 4 MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 /DTS SUR. DISPLAY RETURN ENTERTAINMENT 2 MONO MOVIE + TEST ROCK CONCERT 1 TV SPORTS MENU TITLE 9 ENTER EFFECT REC LEVEL AUDIO DISC SKIP PRESET/CH SET MENU MENU TITLE A/B/C/D/E – SELECT + TEST RETURN DISPLAY REC AUDIO DISC SKIP Component control area You can control up to 9 different components. You can set up manufacturer code and program other remote control functions for each component (see page 50). 48 0109V530_48-53_EN(GB) 48 1/18/02, 6:45 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Setting the manufacturer code The following table shows factory-set component (Library: component category) and the manufacturer code for each component control. Component category (Library) Manufacturer CD CD YAMAHA 0005 MD/CD-R MD YAMAHA 0024 TUNER TUNER YAMAHA 0003 1 Press an input selector button or Å/ı to select the component control for which you want to clear the manufacturer code. Code DVD YAMAHA 0098 – – – V-AUX – – – VCR – – – A – – – B – – – 2 POWER MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP POWER TV AV CD Press CODE SET by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice. TRANSMIT CODE SET Note 1 CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice. • If you do not press any button within 30 seconds after step 2, the clearing process is canceled. If this happens, start over from step 1. 3 Enter the code number “0000”. The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice, and the manufacturer code for the selected component is cleared. ADVANCED OPERATION 2 Press an input selector button or Å/ı to select the component you want to set up. y • You can clear all setup manufacturer codes at once by entering the code number “9990”. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION TRANSMIT CODE SET 3 Press the numeric buttons to enter the four digit manufacturer’s code for the component to be used. Refer to “LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES” at the end of this manual. HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 ENTERTAINMENT 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 APPENDIX 5 /DTS SUR. BASIC OPERATION DVD D-TV/CBL SYSTEM STANDBY POWER PREPARATION Component control (buttons) ■ Clearing setup manufacturer code for the component control INTRODUCTION You can control other components by setting a manufacturer code. Codes can be set for each of the 9 component controls. Clearing setup manufacturer codes ENTER EFFECT The TRANSMIT indicator flashes twice. English Notes • If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. • If you wait for more than 30 seconds during step 3, the setup process is canceled. If this happens, start over from step 2. 49 0109V530_48-53_EN(GB) 49 1/18/02, 6:46 PM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Controlling other components You can operate other components when you have set the manufacturer code for your component. Note, however, that some buttons may not operate your component. Once you select an input source, the remote control switches to the mode for operating the component. TRANSMIT CODE SET 1 2 SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R STANDBY POWER TUNER SLEEP DVD D-TV/CBL V-AUX 6CH INPUT VCR A B AMP TV MUTE TV INPUT HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 MUTE 7 5 /DTS SUR. 9 3 4 ENTERTAINMENT 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER w EFFECT + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – TV MUTE TV INPUT 8 LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU MENU TITLE e A/B/C/D/E – 9 – 0 RETURN + SELECT TEST 5 6 DVD player VCR TV, digital/cable TV MUTE HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 CD player ENTERTAINMENT 4 DISPLAY AUDIO q DISC SKIP CD/MD recorder Tuner 1 AV POWER *1Power *1Power *3VCR power *1Power *1Power *1Power 2 TV POWER *2TV power *2TV power *2TV power *2TV power *2TV power *2TV power 3 TV CH + *2TV channel up *2TV channel up TV channel up *2TV channel up *2TV channel up *2TV channel up TV CH – *2TV channel down *2TV channel down TV channel down *2TV channel down *2TV channel down *2TV channel down 4 TV VOL + *2TV volume up *2TV volume up TV volume up *2TV volume up *2TV volume up *2TV volume up TV VOL – *2TV volume down *2TV volume down TV volume down *2TV volume down *2TV volume down *2TV volume down *2TV mute *2TV mute TV mute *2TV mute *2TV mute *2TV mute 5 TV MUTE 6 TV INPUT * TV input * TV input TV input * TV input * TV input *2TV input 7 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Preset stations (1-8) 8 TITLE 9 PRESET/CH u PRESET/CH d 2 Up VCR channel up Preset up VCR channel down Preset down Left Right q REC/DISC SKIP 2 Down PRESET/CH i SELECT 2 Title PRESET/CH j 0 RETURN 2 Select Return Disc skip Rec *3VCR rec Disc skip Play Play *3VCR play Play Play e Search backward Search backward *3VCR search backward Search backward Search backward r Search forward Search forward *3VCR search forward Search forward Search forward Pause *3VCR pause w AUDIO d Pause Skip backward y Skip forward w ENTER e MENU r DISPLAY Rec (MD) Audio t a r REC Pause Pause Skip backward Skip backward Skip forward Skip forward Stop Stop *3VCR stop Stop Stop Title/Index Enter Enter Index Index Display Display Menu A/B/C/D/E Display *1 This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has POWER button. *2 These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in D-TV/CBL or ı. When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the both D-TV/CBL and ı areas, priority is given to the signal in the D-TV/CBL area. *3 These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR if the manufacturer code is set in VCR. 50 0109V530_48-53_EN(GB) 50 1/18/02, 6:46 PM ADJUSTING THE LEVEL OF THE EFFECT SPEAKERS 3 Adjustment should be made with the remote control. Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level. • The control range for the center or rear left and right speakers is from +10 dB to –10 dB. • The control range for the subwoofer is from 0 dB to –20 dB. PRESET/CH TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R DVD D-TV/CBL A + + POWER TUNER SLEEP MUTE V-AUX 6CH INPUT JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 /DTS SUR. AMP B HALL 9 1 ENTER EFFECT + PRESET/CH LEVEL TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT HALL JAZZ CLUB SET MENU MENU TITLE A/B/C/D/E – SELECT + TEST DISPLAY RETURN MUTE ROCK CONCERT REC ENTERTAINMENT – ENTERTAINMENT AUDIO 2 2 3 DISC SKIP Press AMP. AMP Notes • When the speaker output modes for “1A CENTER” and “1C REAR LR” are set to NON, and “1D BASS” to MAIN, the output level of those speakers cannot be adjusted because there is no sound coming from these speakers. • When you adjust the output level with LEVEL, the settings you made with the test tone will be changed. • We recommend adjusting the speakers by following the steps described in “Using the test tone” on pages 21 and 22. ■ For 5ch Stereo (While playing a source) 2 + You can adjust the volume level for each channel in 5channel stereo mode. Control range: 0 to 100% • CT level (Center level) • RL level (Rear left level) • RR level (Rear right level) ADVANCED OPERATION Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the speaker(s) you want to adjust. Each time you press LEVEL, the selected speaker changes and appears on the front panel display as follows: center, rear right, rear left and subwoofer. LEVEL TITLE Rear right speaker output level Rear left speaker output level 1 2 Select 5ch Stereo. 3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level. Press u / d repeatedly to select the speaker(s) you want to adjust. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, set the output level again. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Center speaker output level BASIC OPERATION 1 SELECT PREPARATION VCR STANDBY INTRODUCTION You can adjust the output level of each effect speaker (center, rear left and right, and subwoofer) while listening to a source. APPENDIX Subwoofer output level y • Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker(s) to be adjusted by pressing d / u. PRESET/CH – TITLE SELECT English LEVEL + 51 0109V530_48-53_EN(GB) 51 1/18/02, 6:46 PM ADJUSTING THE DELAY TIME You can adjust the time difference between the beginning of the sound from the main speakers and the beginning of the sound effect from the rear speakers. The larger the value, the later the sound effect is generated. The delay time can be individually adjusted to all DSP programs. Adjustment should be made with the remote control. TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R DVD D-TV/CBL VCR 1 The following table shows factory-set delay time. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Program CONCERT HALL JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT DISCO GAME CONCERT VIDEO TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE 70 mm SPECTACLE DGTL SPECTACLE DTS SPECTACLE Spectacle 6.1 70 mm SCI-FI Sci-Fi 6.1 DGTL SCI-FI DTS SCI-FI 70 mm ADVENTURE DGTL ADVENTURE DTS ADVENTURE Adventure 6.1 70 mm GENERAL DGTL GENERAL DTS GENERAL General 6.1 PRO LOGIC/NORMAL DOLBY DIGITAL/NORMAL DTS DIGITAL SUR./NORMAL Matrix 6.1 PRO LOGIC/ENHANCED DOLBY DIGITAL/ENHANCED DTS DIGITAL SUR./ENHANCED Enhanced 6.1 PRO LOGIC Movie PRO LOGIC Music Preset value (ms) 45 30 15 26 36 21 10 69 23 15 15 15 20 15 15 15 20 15 15 15 20 15 15 15 15 5 5 5 20 5 5 5 15 5 A STANDBY POWER TUNER SLEEP MUTE V-AUX 6CH INPUT AMP B 52 JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 ENTER /DTS SUR. 9 ENTERTAINMENT 2 EFFECT + + + TV VOL TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT LEVEL PRESET/CH JAZZ CLUB A/B/C/D/E – SELECT + TEST MUTE HALL SET MENU MENU TITLE ROCK CONCERT ENTERTAINMENT RETURN DISPLAY REC AUDIO 3 4 DISC SKIP 1 Press AMP. AMP (While playing a source) 2 Select a DSP program you want to adjust the delay time. 3 Press u / d so that “DELAY” appears on the front panel display. PRESET/CH – 4 SELECT + DELAY Press j / i to adjust the delay time. Notes • Adding too much delay will cause an unnatural effect with some sources. • The sound is momentarily interrupted while adjusting the delay time. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the delay time again. 52 0109V530_48-53_EN(GB) HALL 1/18/02, 6:46 PM ADJUSTING THE PARAMETER SETTINGS FOR PRO LOGIC You can adjust the values of PRO LOGIC Music parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Adjustments should be made with the remote control. TRANSMIT CODE SET SYSTEM AV CD MD/CD-R DVD VCR D-TV/CBL A STANDBY POWER TUNER SLEEP MUTE V-AUX 6CH INPUT JAZZ CLUB ROCK CONCERT 1 2 3 4 TV SPORTS MONO MOVIE MOVIE THEATER 1 MOVIE THEATER 2 5 6 7 8 SELECT MATRIX 6.1 STEREO 0 +10 /DTS SUR. AMP B HALL 9 1 ENTERTAINMENT 2 ENTER EFFECT + + + LEVEL PRESET/CH TV CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV VOL TV INPUT JAZZ CLUB 3 4 A/B/C/D/E – + SELECT TEST ROCK CONCERT DISPLAY RETURN MUTE HALL SET MENU MENU TITLE REC ENTERTAINMENT AUDIO • You cannot change parameter values when “10 MEM. GUARD” on the SET MENU is set to ON. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the parameter value you edited will return to the factory setting. If so, edit the parameter value again. ■ PANORAMA 1 Press AMP. 2 Select PRO LOGIC AMP Function: Choices: 9 ■ DIMENSION Function: Gradually adjusts the soundfield either towards the front or towards the rear. Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard). SELECT 0 Press u / d to select the parameter. – Press j / i to change the parameter value. + PRESET/CH – SELECT + Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. The larger the value, adjusts the center image towards the main left and right speakers. Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from main left and right speakers), initial setting is 3. APPENDIX 5 SELECT ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 4 ■ CT WIDTH (Center width) PRESET/CH ADVANCED OPERATION /DTS SUR. Music. Turning the function on extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for wraparound effect. OFF/ON, initial setting is OFF. BASIC OPERATION PRO LOGIC Music parameter descriptions DISC SKIP 3 PREPARATION POWER TV INTRODUCTION Note Changing parameter settings POWER MUSIC Repeat steps 3 and 4 above as necessary to change other parameters. English 53 0109V530_48-53_EN(GB) 53 1/18/02, 6:46 PM TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, or enters in the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. No sound. The picture does not appear. Cause Remedy The power cord is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Firmly connect the power cord. — The IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch on the rear panel is not fully set to either the left or right position. Set the switch fully to the left or right position when this unit is in the standby mode. 12 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. 10, 11 This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity). Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then start operating. Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 10 – 16 An appropriate input source has not been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT l / h or 6CH INPUT (or the input selector buttons). 23 The speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. 24 The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. — Digital signals which this unit cannot reproduce are being input to this unit by playing a CD-ROM, etc. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. — The output and input for the picture are connected to different types of video jacks. Make connections using the same type of video jacks (S VIDEO, VIDEO (composite), or COMPONENT VIDEO) for both the input and output. 54 0110V530_54-61_EN(GB) Refer to page 54 1/18/02, 6:46 PM — 10, 11 14, 15 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause The sound suddenly goes off. The protection circuit has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Check the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch is set to the appropriate position and then turn this unit back on. 12 Check the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has functioned. Turn on the power, and play the source again. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. — Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 10, 11 Incorrect setting of “5 L/R BALANCE” on the SET MENU. Adjust it to the appropriate position. 46 The sound effect is off. Press STEREO/EFFECT to turn it on. 28 A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS decoding DSP program is being used with material not encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS. Select another DSP program. No sound from the center speaker. — Raise the level of the center speaker. 51 “1A CENTER” on the SET MENU is set to NON. Select the appropriate mode for your center speaker. 43 One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (1 to 4) has been selected (except for 5ch Stereo). Select another DSP program. — The output level of the rear speakers is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the rear speakers. A monaural source is being played with program 9. Select another DSP program. “1D BASS” on the SET MENU is set to MAIN when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Select SWFR or BOTH. 44 “1D BASS” on the SET MENU is set to SWFR or MAIN when a 2-channel source is being played. Select BOTH. 44 Poor bass reproduction. 26 – 33 APPENDIX The source does not contain low bass signals (90 Hz and below). 51 — Select MAIN. 44 The speaker mode settings (main, center, or rear) on the SET MENU does not match your speaker configuration. Select the appropriate position for each speaker based on the size of the speakers in your configuration. 43, 44 55 0110V530_54-61_EN(GB) 55 1/18/02, 6:46 PM English “1D BASS” on the SET MENU is set to SWFR or BOTH and your system does not include a subwoofer. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION No sound from the subwoofer. 26 – 33 ADVANCED OPERATION The output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. The source encoded with a Dolby Digital or DTS signal does not have a center channel signal. No sound from the rear speakers. 26 – 33 BASIC OPERAIONT A 96-kHz sampling digital signal is being input to this unit. PREPARATION No sound from the effect speakers. Refer to page INTRODUCTION Only the speaker on one side can be heard. Remedy TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy Refer to page A “humming” sound can be heard. Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power to the component. The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect by a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack of this unit. A source component is not connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit. Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit. — The sound field parameters and some other settings on this unit cannot be changed. “10 MEM. GUARD” in the SET MENU is set to ON. Set “10 MEM. GUARD” in the SET MENU to OFF. — This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — “CHECK SP WIRES” appears on the front panel display. Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. — There is noise interference from digital or high-frequency equipment, or this unit. This unit is too close to the digital or high-frequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. — This unit suddenly turns into the standby mode. The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait until this unit cools down and then turn it back on. — 56 — — 56 0110V530_54-61_EN(GB) 10 – 16 1/18/02, 6:46 PM TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Tuner Problem Cause 17 Use the manual tuning method. 34 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multipath interference. — The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The station is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. 17 Use the manual tuning method. 34 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Re-store the stations. The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for best reception. 17 Use the manual tuning method. 34 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. 17 There are buzzing and whining noises (especially in the evening). A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV. — 35, 36 BASIC OPERAIONT AM Check the antenna connections. Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. PREPARATION FM The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Refer to page INTRODUCTION FM stereo reception is noisy. Remedy ADVANCED OPERATION ■ Remote control The remote control does not work nor function properly. Cause Remedy Refer to page The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 7 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries with new ones. 3 The manufacture code has not correctly set. Set the code correctly. 49 Try setting another code of the same manufacturer. — — English Even if the manufacturer code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. APPENDIX Wrong distance or angle. 57 0110V530_54-61_EN(GB) 57 1/18/02, 6:46 PM ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Problem GLOSSARY ■ Dolby Surround Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 main left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a rear channel for special sound effects (monaural). The rear channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, 2 rear channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1 channels). ■ Dolby Digital ■ LFE 0.1 channel Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 rear stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the rear speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with previously unheard of excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5 channels in a Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1 channel systems. ■ Matrix 6.1 The unit incorporates Matrix 6.1 decoder for Dolby Digital and DTS multi-channel software that enables 6.1channel reproduction by adding the rear center channel to existing 5.1-channel format. (The rear center channel is created from rear left and right channels, and outputted from virtual rear center speaker.) With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-over ” and “fly-around ” effects. ■ CINEMA DSP ■ SILENT CINEMA YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed using headphones. ■ Dolby Pro Logic Dolby Pro Logic is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround softwares. This new technology enables a discrete 5channel playback with 2 main left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 rear left and right channels (instead of only 1 rear channel for conventional Pro Logic technology). A music mode is also available for 2-channel sources in addition to the movie mode. 58 0110V530_54-61_EN(GB) 58 D I G I T A L Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater in the listening room of your own home. 1/18/02, 6:46 PM GLOSSARY YAMAHA has developed a virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any rear speakers by using virtual rear speakers. It is even possible to enjoy virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal 2-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) ■ Component video signal Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB/CB and PR/CR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to use the component signal for output. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits PREPARATION ■ S-video signal INTRODUCTION ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP BASIC OPERAIONT ADVANCED OPERATION When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 59 0110V530_54-61_EN(GB) 59 1/18/02, 6:46 PM SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION FM SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Main, Center, Rear 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................................. 75 W [Other models] .................................................................... 65 W 1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................................. 80 W [Other models] .................................................................... 70 W • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Other models] .............................................. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • DIN Standard Output Power [Europe model] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ........................................................ 110 W • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB • Maximum Power (EIAJ) [China, Korea and General models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ........................................................... 95 W • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 Ω [U.S.A. and Canada models] ......................... 95/115/140/160 W [Other models] ............................................... 90/110/130/150 W • Damping Factor 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................... 80 or more • Frequency Response CD to Main L/R ...................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 40 W, 8 Ω, Main L/R ................................ 0.06% • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) CD (250 mV, shorted) to Main L/R, Effect Off ................. 100 dB • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Main L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Main L/R ........................ 60 dB/45 dB • Tone Control (Main L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±10 dB/50 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut ............................................... ±10 dB/20 kHz • Phones Output ............................................................. 0.34 V/560 Ω • Input Sensitivity CD, etc .................................................................... 150 mV/47 kΩ 6CH INPUT ............................................................ 150 mV/47 kΩ • Output Level OUT (REC) ........................................................... 150 mV/1.2 kΩ OUTPUT SUBWOOFER .......................................... 4.0 V/1.2 kΩ VIDEO SECTION • Video Signal Type ...................................................... NTSC or PAL • Composite Video Signal Level ...................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF, 100% mod.) Mono/Stereo ........................ 2.0 µV (17.3 dBf) /25 µV (39.2 dBf) • Selectivity (400 kHz) ............................................................... 70 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ................................................................. 0.2%/0.3% • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 45 dB • Frequency Response ........................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz +0.5, –2 dB AM SECTION • Tuning Range ......................................... 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz • Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................... AC 120 V/60 Hz [Australia model] ................................................. AC 240 V/50 Hz [U.K., Europe and Singapore models] ................ AC 230 V/50 Hz [Korea model] ..................................................... AC 220 V/60 Hz [China and General models] ..... AC 110/120/220/240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. model] .................................................................... 210 W [Canada model] ...................................................... 210 W/260 VA [Other models] ..................................................................... 230 W Standby Mode ............................................................. max. 0.9 W • AC Outlets [U.S.A., Canada, Europe and Singapore models] .......................................................... 2 (Total 100 W maximum) [China and General models] .................. 2 (Total 50 W maximum) [U.K. and Australia models] ......................... 1 (100 W maximum) • Dimension (W x H x D) ........................ 435 x 151 x 387 mm (17” x 5-15/16” x 15-1/8”) • Weight ................................................................... 10.0 kg (21.3 lbs) • Accessories ............................................................... Remote control Batteries 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter [U.K. model] A/V cable [U.S.A., Canada and Australia models] AM loop antenna Indoor FM antenna *Specifications are subject to change without notice. • S-Video Signal Level Y ................................................................................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω C .......................................................................... 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω • Component Video Signal Level Y ................................................................................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω PB/CB, PR/CR ............................................................. 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω • Signal to Noise Ratio ............................................................... 50 dB • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Composite, S-Video ................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB Component ................................................. DC to 30 MHz, –3 dB 60 0110V530_54-61_EN(GB) 60 1/18/02, 6:46 PM LIST OF MANUFACTURER’S CODES LISTE DES CODES FABRICANTS LISTE DER HERSTELLER-CODES LISTA ÖVER TILLVERKARKODER LISTA DEI CODICI DEL FABBRICANTE LISTA DE CÓDIGOS DE FABRICANTES LIJST MET FABRIKANTENCODES CLARIVOX 0821, 0961, 1971 CLATRONIC 1181, 1331 CONCERTO 0791 CONDOR 0761 CONTEC 0151, 1171 CONTINENTAL EDISON 0571, 0651, 0901 CRAIG 1171 CROSLEY 0021, 0491, 1021, 1081, 1401, 1981, 2201, 2251, 2271 CROWN 2541 CTC CLATRONIC 0261 CXC 1171 DAEWOO 0101, 1501, 1511, 2611 DANSAI 0101 DECCA 0271, 0581, 0601, 0971, 1101, 1691 DECCA (UK) 0271, 0581, 0601, 1101, 1681 DEGRAAF 0451, 1351 DIXI 0991, 1511 DOMEOS 0101 DORIC 1031 DUAL 0091, 0601, 1611, 1641, 2101 DUAL-TEC 0601, 1511, 1621, 2111 DUMONT 0261, 0521, 0781, 1021, 1081, 1981, 2121, 2151 DYNATRON 0101 ELBE 1551, 1971, 2031 ELECTRO TECH 1511 ELEKTRONSKA 0771 ELMAN 0261, 1621 ELTA 1511 EMERSON 0921, 1021, 1081, 1121, 1171, 1261, 1301 ERRES 0101 ETRON 1981 EUROPHON 0261, 0581, 0601, 0771, 1091, 1621, 2001 FENNER 0101, 1511 FERGUSON 0281, 0371, 0551, 0651, 0781, 0861, 0881, 1131, 1181, 1361, 1461, 1971, 1991, 2281, 2311, 2341 FIDELITY 0451, 0761, 2281 FIDELITY (UK) 0561, 0591, 1931, 2281 FILMNET 1141 FINLANDIA 0451, 2321 FINLUX 0021, 0261, 0491, 0521, 0781, 0811, 0871, 1081, 1411, 1421, 1981, 2051, 2091, 2121, 2151, 2551 TV ADMIRAL 0411, 0451, 0911, 1021, 1081 AIKO 0891 AKAI 0061, 0101, 0231, 1191, 1351, 1591, 1641, 1791, 1891, 1981 AKURA 1331 ALBA 1241, 1331, 2361 ALBIRAL 1971 AMSTRAD 1301, 1511 ANAM 1171 ARC EN CIEL 0571 ARCAM 0571, 0761 ARISTONA 0751 ARTHUR MARTIN 0451, 1641 ASA 0411, 0451, 0521, 0781, 0871, 1021, 1081, 1421, 2051, 2091, 2151, 2551 ASTRA 1511 ATANTIC 0761 ATLANTIC 0761 ATORI 1511 AUDIOSONIC 1181, 1321, 1511 AUSIND 0491, 1411 AUTOVOX 0091, 0351, 0481, 0491, 0601, 0781, 0951, 1051, 1081, 1391, 1421 BAIRD 1101, 1351 BANG & OLUFSEN 1081 BASIC LINE 1321, 1331 BAUER 1451 BAUR 0041, 0061, 0121, 0131, 0221, 1561 BEKO 2491, 2501 BLAUPUNKT 0221, 0231, 0241, 0251, 0471, 0741, 2201, 2211, 2221, 2231, 2241, 2261, 2571, 2581 BRANDT 0571, 0651, 0731, 0901, 1821 BRIONVEGA 1021, 1051, 1081 BRITANNIA 0761 BRUNS 0821, 0991, 1021, 1081 BSR 0391, 0691, 1621, 1901, 1981 BUSH 0451, 1241, 1331, 1641, 1741, 2131, 2151 BUSH (UK) 0481, 1561, 1611 CANDLE 0791 CENTURY 1021, 1081 CGE 0491, 0811, 0981, 1401, 1531, 1611, 1621, 1981, 2201, 2251, 2271 CITIZEN 0791 FIRST LINE FISHER 1981 0021, 0091, 0141, 0511, 0601, 0801, 0821, 0981, 1021, 1081, 1981, 2091 FORGESTONE 2281 FORMENTI 0451, 0491, 0761, 1081, 1451, 1541, 1981 FORMENTI-PHOENIX 0021, 0431, 0451, 0591, 1411 FORTRESS 1081 FRONTECH 0451, 1181, 1981 FUJITSU 1261 FUNAI 0391, 0691, 1171, 1181, 1261 FUTURETECH 1171 GBC 0021, 0141, 1321, 1511, 1621, 1981 GEC 0451, 1101, 1281, 2321 GEC (UK) 0031, 0081, 0581, 0601, 1101, 1281, 1561 GELOSO 0021, 0411, 0451, 1321, 1511, 1621, 1981 GENERAL TECHNIC 2681 GENEXXA 0451, 1331 GOLDSTAR 0591, 0601, 0761, 0791, 1371, 1491, 1511, 1561, 1621, 1641 GOODMANS 0141, 1101, 1371, 1641, 2301 GORENJE 0981, 1061 GRAETZ 0451 GRANADA 0141, 0451, 0491, 0581, 0601, 1101, 1111, 1351, 1981, 2321 GRANADA (UK) 0081, 0141, 0451, 0491, 0581, 0601, 1031, 1311, 1521, 1561, 1641 GRUNDIG 0221, 0231, 0471, 0491, 0711, 0741, 1381, 2021, 2041, 2141, 2151 HANSEATIC 0021, 0121, 0141, 0431, 0591, 1561 HANTAREX 0581 HEMMERMANN 0061 HIFIVOX 0331, 0571 HINARI 0071, 0141, 0451, 1261, 1351, 1511, 1641, 1981, 2011 HITACHI 0001, 0011, 0031, 0081, 0141, 0291, 0331, 0341, 0451, 0601, 0631, 0701, 1281, 1561, 1601, 1821, 1831, 1841, 1861, 1871, 1881, 1891, 1941, 1981, 2051, 2321, 2341 HYPER 0591, 0601, 1511, 1621 IMPERIAL 0451, 0491, 0811, 0981, 1401, 1611, 1621, 2201, 2251, 2271 INGERSOL 1511 INNO HIT 0581, 0601, 0841, 1101, 1331, 1371, 1511, 2011 INNOVATION 2591, 2601, 2611, 2621, 2641, 2651, 2661, 2711, 2721, 2761, 2771, 2781 INTERFUNK 0031, 0041, 0061, 0121, 0181, 0451, 0491, 1081, 1641, 1791, 1821, 1981, 2231 IRRADIO 0491, 1321, 1331, 1371, 1411, 1511, 2011 ISUKAI 1331 ITT 0031, 0041, 0051, 0061, 0071, 0081, 0181, 0411, 0451, 0491, 1241, 1291, 1351, 1501, 1601, 1641, 1741, 1921, 1981, 2091, 2331, 2431 ITT-NOKIA 0031, 0041, 0051, 0061, 0071, 0081, 0181, 0411, 0451, 0491, 1241, 1291, 1351, 1501, 1601, 1641, 1741, 1921, 1981, 2091, 2331, 2431 JVC (VICTOR) 0071, 0721, 1441, 1581, 1591, 1741, 1791 KAISUI 0591, 1321, 1331 KAMOSONIC 0601 KARCHER 0591, 0601, 0841, 1091, 1321, 1511, 1561, 2051 KAWASHO 0761 KENDO 0261 KENNEDY 0021, 0351, 0951, 1981 KONKA 2701 KORTING 0431, 1011, 1021, 1081, 1541 I 08V530RDS_code(GB) 1 1/18/02, 11:05 PM NECKERMANN KTV LENOIR LEYEO LIFETEC 0601, 1171 0601, 1511 1181 2591, 2601, 2611, 2621, 2641, 2651, 2661, 2671, 2681, 2691, 2711, 2761, 2771, 2781 LOEWE OPTA 0121, 0131, 0581, 0611, 1081 LOGIC 1691, 2281 LOGIK 0551, 1681, 2281 LOWEWE 0831 LUMA 0351, 0451, 1901 LUXMAN 0791 LUXMAN STEREO TUNER 0791 LUXOR 0001, 0061, 0181, 0341, 0421, 0451, 0461, 0491, 0601, 0671, 1351, 1371, 1561, 1601, 1911, 1921, 1981 LYCO 1181 MAGNADYNE 0021, 0061, 0261, 0581, 0641, 0771, 1021, 1081, 1621, 1981 MAGNAFON 0261, 0491, 0581, 0591, 0641, 0761, 1091, 2001 MANESTH 0101 MARANTZ 0101 MARELLI 1081 MARK 0101 MATSUI 0061, 0451, 0601, 0691, 1101, 1151, 1241, 1271, 1301, 1511, 1561, 1681, 1691 MAXIMAL 0071, 1981 MCMICHAEL 1281 MEDION 2591, 2601, 2611, 2621, 2641, 2651, 2661, 2671, 2681, 2691, 2711, 2721, 2761, 2771, 2781 MEMOREX 1511 METZ 0231, 0741, 1001, 1041, 1081, 1481, 2071, 2081 MGA 1231 MICROMAXX 2591, 2621, 2641, 2651, 2711, 2761, 2771, 2781 MINERVA 0221, 0231, 0491, 1381, 2141, 2151 MISTRAL 2281 MITSUBISHI 0141, 0201, 0231, 0661, 1191, 1201, 1231, 1671, 1691, 1741 MIVAR 0491, 0501, 0581, 0591, 0761, 0771, 1371, 1431, 2031 MTC 0791 MULTITECH 0261, 0581, 0601, 0641, 0981, 1321, 1511 MURPHY 0451, 2091 MURPHY (UK) 0081, 1031 N.E.I. 0101, 0961 NAD 1341 NEC 0141, 1711, 1721, 1731 NEDIATOR NICAMAGIC NIKKAI 0451, 0601, 0981, 1081, 1561, 1931, 1981, 2211, 2231, 2241 0101 0761 1101, 1331, 1641, 1701, 2011 NOBLIKO 0261, 0491, 0591, 0641, 1381, 1411 NOGAMATIC 0571 NOKIA 0031, 0041, 0051, 0061, 0071, 0081, 0181, 0411, 0451, 0491, 1241, 1291, 1351, 1501, 1601, 1641, 1741, 1921, 1981, 2091, 2331, 2431, 2461, 2791 NORDMENDE 0031, 0291, 0331, 0451, 0531, 0541, 0571, 1051, 1131, 1591, 1791, 1811, 1821, 1891, 1941, 2631 OCEANIC 0321, 1651, 1981 OCEANIC (F) 0031, 0061, 0321, 0441, 1661 ONCEAS 0601 ONWA 1171 ORION 0061, 0391, 0691, 0851, 1211, 1241, 1251, 1301, 1481, 1511, 1681, 1691, 1981, 2371, 2421 OSAKA 2011 OSAKI 1101, 1331, 2011 OSUME 0151 OTTO VERSAND 0021, 0121, 0141, 0221, 0601, 1561, 1741, 1981 PAEL 0591, 1411 PANASONIC 0031, 0201, 0211, 0451, 0701, 1311, 1751, 1961, 2561, 2741 PANORAMIC 2351 PATHE MARCONI 0571 PATHE’ CINEMA (F) 0431, 0591, 1621, 1661, 1971 PAUSA 1511 PAUZA 1511 PERDIO 0891, 1101 PHILCO 0021, 0491, 0811, 0981, 1021, 1081, 1401, 1611, 1621, 1751, 2201, 2251, 2271, 2451, 2471 PHILIPS 0101, 0361, 0591, 0621, 0681, 0751, 0761, 1021, 1081, 1281, 2031, 2281, 2291, 2431, 2441, 2511, 2731 PHOENIX 1081 PHONOLA 0751, 1081 PIONEER 0291, 0451, 1341, 1821 PRANDONI-PRINCE 0411, 0451, 0491, 0581, 1411 PRANDONI-PROMCE 0451, 0491, 0581 PRIMA PROFEX PROTECH QUELLE 0451 1981 0641, 1181, 1981 0041, 0061, 0121, 0221, 0231, 0391, 0491, 0521, 0601, 0781, 1371, 1381, 1411, 1421, 1641, 1681, 2051, 2091, 2141, 2151, 2201, 2211, 2231, 2241, 2251, 2271, 2551, 2571, 2581 REDIOMARELLI 0101, 0451, 0661, 0771, 1081 RADIONETTE 0031, 2051, 2091 RADIOLA 2291 RANK 0481, 2151 RBM 2131, 2151 RBM (UK) 0481 REDIFFUSION 0451, 0661, 1641, 1981, 2331 REDIFFUSION (UK) 0061, 0081, 1031 REX 0071, 0101, 0351, 0411, 0451, 0951, 1901, 2061, 2101, 2111 RFT 0991, 2511 ROADSTAR 1321, 1511 ROTEL 0151 SABA 0291, 0331, 0421, 0451, 0531, 0541, 0571, 0581, 0651, 0731, 0931, 1021, 1071, 1081, 1131, 1791, 1811, 1821, 1891, 1941, 2631 SACCS 1971 SAISHO 0451, 0601, 1161, 1241, 1301, 1511, 1671, 1681, 1691 SALORA 0011, 0041, 0061, 0071, 0341, 0451, 0671, 1291, 1351, 1521, 1561, 1601, 1641, 1911, 1921, 1931, 1981, 2321 SAMBERS 0261, 0491, 0581, 0641, 1091, 1371, 1411, 2001 SAMSUNG 0101, 0601, 0841, 0981, 1101, 1181, 1371, 1511, 2011 SANYO 0141, 0151, 0401, 0601, 0801, 0821, 0981, 1021, 1101, 1111, 1291, 1351, 1691, 1741, 2051, 2091, 2551 SBR 0681, 0751, 1281, 2281 SCHAUB LORENZ 0451 SCHNEIDER 0021, 0071, 0091, 0451, 0511, 0591, 0601, 0751, 1321, 1361, 1621, 1641, 2101, 2111, 2291 SCOTT 1171, 1261 SEG 0261, 0601, 0821, 0991 SEI 0641, 0691, 1081, 1301, 1481, 1981 II 08V530RDS_code(GB) 2 1/18/02, 11:05 PM SELECO 0071, 0101, 0351, 0411, 0451, 0951, 1901, 2061, 2101, 2111 SENTRA 1601 SHARP 0141, 0151, 0191, 1761, 1781 SIAREM 0021, 0261, 0581, 0641, 1021, 1081, 1981 SICATEL 1971 SIEMENS 0151, 0221, 0231, 0451, 0741, 2011, 2201, 2211, 2221, 2231, 2241, 2261, 2571, 2581 SILVER 1181 SINGER 0021, 0261, 1021, 1081 SINUDYNE 0021, 0061, 0101, 0261, 0391, 0641, 0691, 0851, 0941, 1021, 1081, 1241, 1301, 1321, 1481, 1631, 1981 SKANTIC 0451 SOLAVOX 0451, 1641, 2011 SONOKO 0101, 1181, 1511 SONY 0141, 0171, 1121, 1681, 1691, 2751 SOUNDESIGN 1171 SSS 1171 STERN 0071, 0101, 0351, 0411, 0451, 0951, 1901, 2061, 2101, 2111 SUNKAI 0691 SUPRA 0791 TANDBERG 0161, 0331, 0611, 1021, 1421, 1771, 1791, 2081 TANDY 0191, 0451, 1331, 1531 TASHIKO 0141 TATUNG 0271, 0581, 0601, 0971, 1101, 1681, 1691 TCM 2621, 2641, 2711, 2761, 2771, 2781 TECHNICS 1311 TECHWOOD 0791 TEKNIKA 1171, 1231, 1261 TELE 1141 TELEAVIA 0571, 0651, 0731, 1821 TELEFUNKEN 0291, 0301, 0311, 0551, 0731, 1131, 1471, 1591, 1791, 1801, 1811, 1821, 1991, 2161, 2171, 2181, 2191, 2201, 2251, 2271, 2521, 2631 TELETECH 1511 TEMPEST 2381, 2391, 2401, 2411 TENSAI 1331, 2091 TEXET 0601 THOMSON 0331, 0481, 0531, 0571, 0631, 0651, 0731, 0901, 1241, 1571, 1591, 1791, 1811, 1821, 1891, 1941, 2531 THORN 0741, 0861, 2091, 2251, 2271, 2281 THORN-FERGUSON 0281, 0371, 0551, 0651, 0781, 0861, 0881, 1131, 1181, 1361, 1461, 1971, 1991, 2281 TMK 0141, 0791, 1471 TOSHIBA 0141, 0381, 0481, 1221, 1271, 1701, 1741, 1851, 2151, 2801, 2811 TRANS CONTINENS 0451 TRISTAR 2281 TRIUMPH 0481, 0581, 2121 UHER 0431, 0451, 0481, 0491, 0511, 1311, 1541 ULTRAVOX 0021, 0261, 0591, 1021, 1081, 1981 UNIVERSUM 1181, 2051 UNIVOX 1971 VEGAVOX 0811 VEXA 0101, 1511 VIDEOTON 2481 VORTEC 0101, 0651 VOXSON 0411, 0451, 0491, 1021, 1081 WALTHAM 0451 WATSON 0431, 2201, 2241 WATT RADIO 0021, 0061, 0261, 0591, 0641, 0761, 1091, 1971, 1981, 2001 WEGA 0141, 1081, 1981 WEGA COLOR 1021 WELTBLICK 0101 WESTON 1621 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0101, 0261, 0431, 0591, 0761, 1401, 1541 YOKO 0601, 1511 ZANUSSI 0071, 0101, 0351, 0411, 0451, 0951, 1901, 2061, 2101, 2111 ZOPPAS 0451 SATELLITE TUNER AKAI ALBA AMSTRAD 1276 0826, 1276 0166, 0796, 1016, 1026, 1296 ANKARO 0476 AST 0406 ASTRA 0126 BARCOM 0476 BLAUPUNKT 0966 BMC SATELLITE 0106 BRITISH TELECOM 1276 BUSH 0826 BUSH (UK) 0956 CAMBRIDGE 0196, 1276 CANAL PLUS (FRANCE) 1536 CHAPARRAL 0016, 0696, 1006 COLUMBUS 0616 CONNEXIONS 0306, 0426 DISCUS ELIPSE 0856, 0866 DISKXPRESS 0426, 0476 DRAKE 1516 ECHOSTAR 0226, 0236, 0606, 0626, 0666, 0926, 0996, 1046, 1056, 1066, 1106 ELTA 1286 ELTA SAT 0146 EURODEC 1226, 1236, 1246 FERGUSON 0046, 0176, 0186, 0296, 0846, 0956, 1306 FINLUX 0976 FRACARRO 0026, 0536, 0776 FUBA 0476, 0616, 0636, 1056 GIUCAR RECORD 0206, 0336 GRUNDIG 0176, 0946, 0956, 0966 HIGH PERFORMANCE 0916 HIRSCHMANN 0756, 0966 HITACHI 0446, 0516, 0706, 0946 ICX INTERNATIONAL 0886 ITT 0066, 0126, 0176, 0446, 1156 ITT/NOKIA 0066, 0126, 0176, 0446, 1156 JEEMON 0146 JERROLD 0846, 0986 JOHANSSON 0246 JVC 1276 KATHREIN 0116, 0266, 0276, 0366 KOSMOS 0266 KYOSTAR 1036, 1086 LENG 0246 LIFESAT 1326, 1346, 1356 LUXOR 0126, 0136, 0446, 0466, 0506, 1156 MACAB 0356 MASPRO 0016, 0116, 0256, 0956 MEDION 1326, 1346 METZ 0966 MICROMAXX 1326, 1346 MITSUBISHI 0966 MORGANS 0596 MURATTO 0406 NEC 0286, 0316, 0766, 0786, 0836 NETWORK 0046 NIKKO 1136, 1146 CABLE TV CABLETIME 1446, 1456, 1476 CLYDE CABLEVISION 1426 FILMNET 1396, 1436 FRANCE TELECOM 1386 GEC 1426 JERROLD 1416 MOVIE TIME 1466 NSC 1466 PHILIPS 1386 PIONEER 0006 SAMSUNG 1496 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 1486, 1506 STARCOM 1416 STS 1466 TANDBERG 1366 TELE 1436 TELE +1 1436 TELESERVICE 1406, 1476 TUDI 1376 UNITED CABLE 1416 ZENITH 1406 NOKIA 0066, 0126, 0176, 0446, 1156, 1166, 1336 NORSAT 0786 OTTO VERSAND 0966 PACE 0046, 0176, 0296, 0936, 0956, 1306, 1566, 1576 PACE MSS 0946 PACE SKY DIGITAL BOX (UK) 1526 PALCOM 0616, 0686, 0706 PALSAT 0396 PALTEC 0706 PANASONIC 0806, 1306 PANSAT 1076 PHILIPS 0326, 0346, 0476, 0956, 1126, 1186, 1196, 1206, 1216, 1306, 1316 PROSAT 1176 PTT TELECOM 0306, 0896 QUELLE 0966 RADIX 1056 REDIFFUSION 0316, 0786 RFT 1186, 1196, 1206, 1216 SAGEM 1256, 1546 SAKURA 0566, 0816 SALORA 0066, 0126, 0136, 0446, 0456, 0486, 0496, 0576 SAMSUNG 0746, 0756 SAT 0406 SATCOM 0896 SATECO 0646 SECTOR 1266 SEDEA 1096 SENTRA 0416 SIEMENS 0896, 0966 SINTRACK 0906 SKYLAB 0476 SKYSCAN 0876 SONY 0736, 0946 STELLA 0306 STRONG 0156, 0396, 1036, 1086 STV 0636 TANDBERG 1116 TANDY 0916 TANTEC 0616 TATUNG 0516, 0546 TECHNISAT 0086, 0096, 0526, 0556, 1056 TELECOM 0306 TELEMAX 0586 THORN-FERGUSON 0046, 0076, 0176, 0186, 0956 TOSHIBA 0946 TPS (FRANCE) 1546 TRIAD 0406 UNIDEN 0036, 0216, 0676, 0716, 0726 US ELECTRONICS 0886 VORTEC 0756, 1036, 1076 VTECH 0436 WINERSAT 0246 WISI 0056, 0356, 0376, 0386, 0406, 0656, 1056, 1156 WOLSEY 0916 XCOM MULTIMEDIA 1556 XSAT (FRANCE) 1556 ZEHNDER 0266, 0406 ZENDER 0406 VCR AIWA AKAI 0042, 0352, 0432 0042, 0422, 0492, 0582, 0612, 0642, 0652, 0762, 0912 ALBA 0002, 0112, 0282, 0332, 0342, 0972 AMSTRAD 0322, 0432, 0452 ANITECH 0002 ANITSCH 1002 ASA 0012, 0052 AUDIOSONIC 0002 BAIRD 0042, 0282, 0492 BANG & OLUFSEN 0042 BAUR 0052, 0062, 0812 BLAUPUNKT 0062, 0092, 0252, 0462, 0672, 0992 BRIONVEGA 0032 BUSH 0002, 0282, 0332, 0342, 0512, 0972 BUSH (UK) 0812 CAPEHART 0112 CGE 0042, 0432, 0762 CRAIG 0072, 0482 CROWN 0112, 0282, 0622 DAEWOO 0112, 0282, 0622 DANSAI 0012 DAYTRON 0112 DECCA 0042, 0052, 0432, 0942 DECCA (UK) 0052 DEGRAAF 0052, 0132, 0432, 0532, 0602 DIXI 0442 DUAL 0042, 0632 DUMONT 0052, 0432, 0532 DYNATECH 0432 DYNATRON 0012 ELBE 0122 ELIN 0072 EMERSON 0012, 0162, 0202, 0432, 0512, 0522 ERRES 0012 FERGUSON 0042, 0712, 0722, 0852, 0902, 1012, 1022, 1082 FIDELITY 0432 FINLANDIA 0052, 0532 FINLUX 0012, 0042, 0052, 0082, 0262, 0382, 0432, 0462, 0492, 0532, 0572, 0602, 0912 FIRST LINE 0002, 0912 FISHER 0162, 0482, 0532, 0542, 0572, 0592 FORMENTI-PHOENIX 0012, 0052 FRONTECH 0112 FUNAI 0432 GBC 0002 GEC (UK) 0022, 0052 GELOSO 0002 GENERAL TECHNIC 1172 GOLDSTAR 0012, 0122, 0812, 0952 GOODMANS 0002, 0072, 0282, 0432, 0502 GOODMANS (UK) 0002 GRAETZ 0022, 0042 GRANADA 0052, 0132, 0532, 0572 III 08V530RDS_code(GB) 3 1/18/02, 11:05 PM NOKIA 0022, 0032, 0042, 0072, 0292, 0492, 0532, 0572, 0762, 1152 NORDMENDE 0042, 0102, 0142, 0192, 0222, 0242, 0392, 0402, 0632, 0732, 0742, 0762, 0782, 0792, 0832, 0842, 0872 OLYMPUS 0462 OPTONICA 0132, 0502 ORION 0162, 0202, 0312, 0442, 0512, 0522, 0982 OSAKA 0432 OSAKI 0002, 0012, 0432 OTTO VERSAND 0052, 0062, 0812 PANASONIC 0022, 0212, 0462, 0672, 0992, 1092, 1102, 1182 PENTAX 0172, 0602 PERDIO 0432 PHILCO 1062 PHILIPS 0052, 0082, 0092, 0152, 0182, 0362, 0372, 0382, 0472, 0502, 1072 PHONOLA 0052, 0152 PILOT 0012 PIONEER 0052, 0142, 0372, 0472 PORTLAND 0112 PROLINE 0432 PYE 0052, 0152 QUARTZ 0572 QUELLE 0012, 0032, 0042, 0052, 0062, 0072, 0092, 0202, 0462, 0522, 0942 RADIONETTE 0022 REALISTIC 0012, 0072, 0132, 0432, 0482, 0502, 0532, 0572 RET 1072 REX 0042, 0742, 0782 RICOH 0952 SABA 0042, 0142, 0192, 0222, 0242, 0392, 0632, 0732, 0742, 0762, 0772, 0782, 0792, 0872 SAISHO 0162, 0202, 0292, 0442, 0512, 0522, 0972 SALORA 0192, 0572, 0812, 0822, 0912 SAMSUNG 0052, 0072, 0622, 0652, 1192 SANSUI 0042, 0142 SANYO 0482, 0532, 0562, 0572 SBR 0052, 0152, 0182 SCHAUB LORENZ 0022, 0042 SCHNEIDER 0002, 0012, 0052, 0072, 0432 SEG 0002, 0072 SEI-SINUDYNE 0442 SELECO 0042 SENTRA 0112 SHARP 0132, 0502, 0702 SHINTOM 0002 SIEMENS 0062, 0092, 0252, 0572 GRANADA (UK) 0052, 0092, 0462, 0602, 0812, 0822 GRUNDIG 0052, 0062, 0092, 0232, 0252, 0262, 0752, 0802 HANSEATIC 0052, 0812 HARMAN/KARDON 0122, 0922 HCM 0002 HINARI 0002, 0202, 0412, 0442, 0522 HITACHI 0042, 0172, 0292, 0432, 0602, 0662, 0812, 1022 IMPERIAL 0072, 0432 INGERSOL 0442 INNO HIT 0002, 0052, 0072 INNOVATION 1142, 1162, 1172 INTERFUNK 0022, 0052 IRRADIO 0002, 0012 ITT 0022, 0032, 0042, 0072, 0292, 0492, 0532, 0572, 0762 ITT-NOKIA 0022, 0032, 0042, 0072, 0292, 0492, 0532, 0572, 0762 JENSEN 0042 JVC (VICTOR) 0042, 0102, 0142, 0272, 0742, 0762, 0782, 0902 KARCHER 0052, 0072, 0812 KENDO 0492 KENWOOD 0042, 0142, 0572 LIFETEC 1142, 1162, 1172 LLOYD 0432 LOEWE OPTA 0052, 0092, 0152 LOGIK 0002, 0072, 0442 LUMA 0162 LUXOR 0492, 0572, 0812 M ELECTRONIC 0432 MAGNADYNE 0052 MAGNASONIC 0572 MANESTH 0012 MARANTZ 0012, 0052, 0092, 0122, 0502 MARK 0012 MARTA 0012 MATSUI 0012, 0442, 0512, 0522, 0812, 0972 MEDION 1142, 1162, 1172 MEMOREX 0012, 0132, 0432, 0482, 0532, 0572 METZ 0062, 0092, 0932 MGA 0912 MICROMAXX 1142, 1162, 1172 MINERVA 0062, 0092, 0252 MINOLTA 0172, 0602 MITSUBISHI 0052, 0062, 0142, 0912, 0922 MTC 0072, 0432 MULTITECH 0002, 0052, 0062, 0282, 0432 MURPHY 0432 N.E.I. 0012, 0052 NATIONAL 0462 NEC 0042, 0122, 0142 NECKERMANN 0032, 0042, 0052, 0072, 0092, 0202, 0522, 0572, 0762, 0812 NIKKAI 0112 NOBLIKO 0092 SINUDYNE 0052, 0382, 0442, 0932 SONOKO 0282 SONY 0432, 0552, 0682, 0692, 0942, 0952, 0962, 1122, 1132 STS 0602 SUNKAI 0512 SUNSTAR 0432 SYLVANIA 0432, 0912 SYMPHONIC 0432, 0912 TANDBERG 0062, 0162, 0522, 0932 TASHIKO 0132, 0432 TATUNG 0042, 0052, 0432, 0922 TCM 1142, 1162, 1172 TEAC 0042, 0432 TECHNICS 0462 TEKNIKA 0012, 0432 TELEFUNKEN 0042, 0192, 0632, 0732, 0742, 0762, 0782, 0882, 0892 TEMPEST 1032, 1042, 1052 TENOSAL 0002 THOMSON 0042, 0102, 0142, 0192, 0402, 0632, 0762 THORN 0042, 0902 THORN-FERGUSON 0042, 0222, 0302, 0712, 0722, 0742, 0762, 0852, 0862, 0872, 0902 TMK 0522 TONSAI 0002 TOSHIBA 0042, 0622, 0912 TOTEVISION 0012, 0072 TRIUMPH 0922 UHER 0042, 0072 ULTRAVOX 0032 UNITECH 0072 VECTOR RESEARCH 0122 VIDEON 1162, 1172 WELTBLICK 0012 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0032 XENON 0162 YAMAHA 0042, 1202 YOKO 0012, 0062, 0072 DVD PLAYER AKAI DENON HITACHI JVC KENWOOD MAGNAVOX MITSUBISHI ONKYO PANASONIC PHILIPS PIONEER PROSCAN RCA SAMSUNG SHARP SONY TECHNICS THOMSON TOSHIBA YAMAHA ZENITH 0058 0188 0198 0088, 0178 0148 0128 0138 0068, 0128 0028 0098, 0128 0108, 0118 0158 0158 0078 0038 0018 0028 0168 0048, 0128 0008, 0028, 0098 0128 IV 08V530RDS_code(GB) 4 1/18/02, 11:05 PM LD PLAYER AIWA FUNAI HITACHI MAGNAVOX PANASONIC PIONEER RCA REALISTIC SAMSUNG SONY VICTOR YAMAHA 0137 0137 0047 0077 0027 0037 0067 0137 0017, 0087 0057, 0097, 0107, 0117 0127 0007 CD PLAYER ACCUPHASE ADC ADCOM AKAI 0315 0865 0785, 1015 0115, 0125, 0725, 0735, 0745, 0935, 1155 ARCAM 1875 ARCAM-ROTEL 0165 AUDIO-TECHNICA 0835 AUDIOSONIC 0155 AIWA 1105, 1235, 1245, 1765, 1915, 1935 BSR 0875 CALIFORNIA AUDIO LAB 1075 CARRERA 0555, 0875 CARVER 0825, 1415 CYRUS-ROTEL 0205 DENON 0045, 0955, 1045, 1595, 1795, 1805 DUAL 1005 ELIN 0185 EMERSON 1015, 1285, 1675 FISHER 0105, 0595, 0605, 0825, 1165, 1175 GENEXXA 0525, 0825, 0855, 0875, 0995, 1265, 1285, 1345, 1355, 1485, 1575, 1675, 1715, 1825 GOLDSTAR 0555, 1185, 1195, 1585 GRUNDIG 0175 HARMAN KARDON 0325, 0495, 0565, 1135, 1145, 1155 HITACHI 0065, 0585, 0685, 0945, 1005, 1015, 1225, 1545 INNOVATION 1995, 2005, 2015 ITT-NOKIA 0185 JVC (VICTOR) 0385, 0395, 0455, 0575, 0585 KARCHER 0485 KENWOOD 0025, 0055, 0145, 0215, 0595, 0675, 0695, 0705, 0715, 0925, 1355, 1485, 1575, 1675, 1715, 1825 KORTING 0175 LIFETEC 2015 LIGHT CONTROL 1155, 1645, 1655, 1665 LINN 0165, 1875 LUXMAN 0265, 0275, 0795, 0805, 1295, 1305, 1555, 1925 THOMSON 1005 TOSHIBA 0755, 0765 VECTOR RESEARCH 0555, 0865 YAMAHA 0005, 0015, 0085, 0345, 0615, 0655, 0815, 0835, 0895, 1815 LUXOR MAGNAVOX MARANTZ 0185, 1895, 1905 1865, 1875 0165, 0175, 0545, 0665, 1275, 1335, 1405, 1505, 1875, 1955 MATSUSHITA 1095, 1605 MCS 0535 MEDION 0075, 1995, 2005, 2015 MEMOREX 0525, 1015, 1265, 1275, 1285, 1675 MGA 1125 MICROMAXX 2015 MISSION 0165, 1875 MITSUBISHI 1125, 1205 NAD 0135, 0255, 0285, 0295, 0305, 0345, 0755, 0765, 1315, 1325 NAKAMICHI 0635, 0645, 1565 NEC 0405, 0535, 0775, 0785 NECKERMAN 0155, 0225 NIKKO 0835, 1165 OCEANIC 0185 OKANO 0155, 0225 ONKYO 0885, 1385, 1425, 1455, 1515 PANASONIC 1055, 1075, 1615, 1625 PHILIPS 0165, 0175, 0195, 1865, 1875 PIONEER 0095, 0335, 0425, 0435, 0445, 0525, 0855, 1035, 1945 PROTON 0905, 1875 QUASAR 1075 RADIOLA 1845, 1855 RADIOTONE 0485 REALISTIC 0825, 1015, 1265, 1275, 1285, 1575 ROTEL 1875 SABA 1005 SAE 1875 SALORA 0185 SANSUI 0415, 0965, 0975, 0985, 1255, 1675, 1875 SANYO 0625, 0825, 0845, 0915 SCHNEIDER 1845, 1855 SCOTT 1285, 1675 SHARP 0025, 0035, 1025, 1115, 1275, 1635, 1785, 1815, 1825, 1835 SHERWOOD 1275, 1445 SIEMENS 1085 SIGNATURE 1155 SONY 0345, 0355, 0365, 0375, 0865, 1685, 1695, 1705, 1715, 1725, 1735, 1745 SYLVANIA 1875 TANDBERG 1885 TASHIKO 1525 TCM 1985, 2015 TEAC 0235, 0245, 1275, 1365, 1375, 1395, 1435, 1465, 1475 TECHNICS 0465, 0475, 1065, 1075, 1625 TELEFUNKEN 1005 THETA DIGITAL 1865 CD RECORDER/CD-RW HITACHI JVC MARANTZ PHILIPS PIONEER YAMAHA 0304 0334 0314, 0324 0274 0284, 0294 0244 MD RECORDER KENWOOD SHARP PIONEER SONY YAMAHA 0214 0264 0254 0224 0024, 0224, 0234 TAPE DECK AKAI DENON GRUNDIG HARMAN JVC KENWOOD KORTING LUXMAN MARANTZ NAD ONKYO PHILIPS PIONEER SONY YAMAHA 0124 0204 0134 0044 0194 0164 0134 0054, 0064, 0074, 0084 0134, 0144 0174 0184 0134, 0144, 0154 0034, 0114 0094, 0104 0004, 0014 V 08V530RDS_code(GB) 5 1/18/02, 11:05 PM GB RX-V530RDS YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD1 7JS, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA 0100V530(GB)-cv1/4 1 RX-V530RDS AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG BRUKSANVISNING MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING Printed in Malaysia V874610 1/18/02, 8:44 PM
  • Page 1 1
  • Page 2 2
  • Page 3 3
  • Page 4 4
  • Page 5 5
  • Page 6 6
  • Page 7 7
  • Page 8 8
  • Page 9 9
  • Page 10 10
  • Page 11 11
  • Page 12 12
  • Page 13 13
  • Page 14 14
  • Page 15 15
  • Page 16 16
  • Page 17 17
  • Page 18 18
  • Page 19 19
  • Page 20 20
  • Page 21 21
  • Page 22 22
  • Page 23 23
  • Page 24 24
  • Page 25 25
  • Page 26 26
  • Page 27 27
  • Page 28 28
  • Page 29 29
  • Page 30 30
  • Page 31 31
  • Page 32 32
  • Page 33 33
  • Page 34 34
  • Page 35 35
  • Page 36 36
  • Page 37 37
  • Page 38 38
  • Page 39 39
  • Page 40 40
  • Page 41 41
  • Page 42 42
  • Page 43 43
  • Page 44 44
  • Page 45 45
  • Page 46 46
  • Page 47 47
  • Page 48 48
  • Page 49 49
  • Page 50 50
  • Page 51 51
  • Page 52 52
  • Page 53 53
  • Page 54 54
  • Page 55 55
  • Page 56 56
  • Page 57 57
  • Page 58 58
  • Page 59 59
  • Page 60 60
  • Page 61 61
  • Page 62 62
  • Page 63 63
  • Page 64 64
  • Page 65 65
  • Page 66 66
  • Page 67 67
  • Page 68 68

Yamaha RX-530 Handleiding

Categorie
AV-ontvangers
Type
Handleiding
Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor